Samsung | BD-D5300 | Samsung BD-D5300 User guide

BD-D5300
Blu-ray™ Disc Player
user manual
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service,
please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Key features
Blu-ray Disc Features
Blu-ray Discs support the highest quality HD video
available in the industry - Large capacity means
no compromise on video quality.
The following Blu-ray Disc features are disc
dependant and will vary.
Appearance and navigation of features will also
vary from disc to disc.
Not all discs will have the features described
below.
Video highlights
The BD-ROM format supports three highly advanced
video codecs, including AVC, VC-1 and MPEG-2.
HD video resolutions are also supported:
• 1920 x 1080 High Definition
• 1280 x 720 High Definition
For High-Definition Playback
To view high-definition contents on a Blu-ray Disc,
you need an HDTV (High Definition Television).
Some Blu-ray Discs may require you to use the
player’s HDMI OUT to view high-definition content.
The ability to view high-definition content on
Blu-ray Discs may be limited depending on the
resolution of your TV.
BD-LIVE
You can use a Blu-ray Disc that supports BDLIVE to download content provided by the disc
manufacturer through a network connection.
2
English
Blu-ray Disc Player Features
Smart Hub
You can download various for pay or freeof-charge applications through a network
connection. These applications provide a range
of Internet services and content including news,
weather forecasts, stock market quotes, games,
movies, and music.
AllShare
You can play videos, music, and photos saved on
your devices (such as your PC, mobile phones, or
NAS) through a network connection.
Playing multimedia files
You can use the USB connection to play various
kinds of multimedia files (MP3, JPEG, DivX, etc.)
located from a USB storage device.
Safety Information
02
Warning
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lighting flash and Arrowhead within the CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC The explanation point within the triangle
triangle is a warning sign alerting you of
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
is a warning sign alerting you of important
dangerous voltage inside the product.
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER instructions accompanying the product.
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Do not install this equipment in a confined space
such as a bookcase or similar unit.
WARNING
To prevent damage which may result in fire
or electric shock hazard, do not expose this
appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
Blu-ray Disc Player USES AN INVISIBLE LASER
BEAM WHICH CAN CAUSE HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE IF DIRECTED. BE SURE
TO OPERATE Blu-ray Disc Player CORRECTLY
AS INSTRUCTED.
CAUTION
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER. USE
OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT
IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO
NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR
YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
PERSONNEL.
This product satisfies CE regulations when
shielded cables and connectors are used to
connect the unit to other equipment. To prevent
electromagnetic interference with electric
appliances, such as radios and televisions, use
shielded cables and connectors for connections.
IMPORTANT NOTE
The mains lead on this equipment is supplied with
a moulded plug incorporating a fuse. The value of
the fuse is indicated on the pin face of the plug.
If it requires replacing, a fuse approved to BS1362
of the same rating must be used.
Never use the plug with the fuse cover omitted
if the cover is detachable. If a replacement fuse
cover is required, it must be of the same colour as
the pin face of the plug. Replacement covers are
available from your dealer.
If the fitted plug is not suitable for the power points
in your house or the cable is not long enough to
reach a power point, you should obtain a suitable
safety approved extension lead or consult your
dealer for assistance.
However, if there is no alternative to cutting off the
plug, remove the fuse and then safely dispose of
the plug. Do not connect the plug to a mains jack,
as there is a risk of shock hazard from the bared
flexible cord.
To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the
plug must be pulled out from the mains socket,
therefore the mains plug shall be readily operable.
The product unit accompanying this user manual
is licensed under certain intellectual property
rights of certain third parties. This licence is limited
to private non-commercial use by end-user
consumers for licensed contents.
No rights are granted for commercial use.
The licence does not cover any product unit
other than this product unit and the licence does
not extend to any unlicensed product unit or
process conforming to ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/
IEC 13818-3 used or sold in combination with this
product unit. The licence only covers the use of
this product unit to encode and/or decode audio
files conforming to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/
IEC 13818-3. No rights are granted under this
licence for product features or functions that do
not conform to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC
13818-3.
English
3
Safety Information
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
Safety Information
Precautions
Important Safety Instructions
Read these operating instructions carefully before
using the unit. Follow all the safety instructions
listed below.
Keep these operating instructions handy for future
reference.
1. Read these instructions.
2. Keep these instructions.
13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms
or when unused for long periods of time.
14. Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. Servicing is required when
the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is
damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus
has been exposed to rain or moisture, does
not operate normally, or has been dropped.
Disc Storage & Management
3. Heed all warnings.
4. Follow all instructions.
Disc Handling
5. Do not use this apparatus near water.
6. Clean only with a dry cloth.
7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install
in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8. Do not install near any heat sources such
as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including AV receivers) that
produce heat.
9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the
polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized
plug has two blades with one wider than the
other. A grounding type plug has two blades
and a third grounding prong. The wide blade
or the third prong are provided for your safety.
If the provided plug does not fit into your
outlet, consult an electrician for replacement
of the obsolete outlet.
10. Protect the power cord from being walked on
or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit
from the apparatus.
11. Only use attachments/accessories specified
by the manufacturer.
12. Use only with the cart,
stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with
the apparatus. When a cart
is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to
avoid injury from tip-over.
4
English
Disc Shape
• Use discs with regular
shapes. If you use an
irregular disc (a disc with a
special shape), you can damage the player.
Holding discs
• Avoid touching the surface of
a disc where data has been
recorded.
Blu-ray Discs
• Do not leave a Blu-ray Disc in the player for long
periods of time. Remove the Blu-ray Disc from
the player and store it in its case.
• Be careful not to scratch or leave fingerprints on
the surface of the Blu-ray Disc.
DVD-VIDEO, Audio CD (CD-DA)
• Wipe off dirt or contamination on the disc with a
soft cloth.
Handling Cautions
• Do not write on the printed side with a ball-point
pen or pencil.
• Do not use record cleaning sprays or antistatic
sprays to clean discs. Also, do not use volatile
chemicals, such as benzene or thinner.
• Do not apply labels or stickers to discs. (Do not
use discs fixed with exposed tape adhesive or
leftover peeled-off stickers.)
• Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
• Do not use discs printed with label printers
available on the market.
• Do not load warped or cracked discs.
• Before connecting other components to this
player, be sure to turn them off.
• Do not move the player while it is playing a disc.
The disc can be scratched or damaged and the
player’s internal parts can be damaged.
• Do not put a flower vase filled with water or any
small metal objects on the player.
• Be careful not to put your hand into the disc
tray.
• Do not place anything other than the disc in the
disc tray.
• Interference from exterior sources such as
lightening and static electricity can affect
the normal operation of this player. If this
occurs, turn the player off and on again with
the POWER button, or disconnect and then
reconnect the AC power cord to the AC power
outlet. The player will operate normally.
Maintenance of Cabinet
Before you clean the Blu-ray Disc’s cabinet, be
sure to disconnect the AC power cord from the
AC outlet.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, or other solvents
for cleaning.
• Wipe the cabinet with a soft cloth.
Restrictions on Playback
• This player may not respond to all operating
commands because some Blu-ray Disc, DVD,
and CD discs allow specific or limited operation
and provide only certain features during
playback.
Please note that this is not a defect in the player.
• Samsung cannot guarantee that this player
will play every disc bearing the Blu-ray Disc,
DVD or CD logo because disc formats evolve,
and problems and errors may occur during the
creation of Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD software
and/or the manufacture of discs.
Please contact the SAMSUNG customer care
center if you have questions or encounter
difficulty in playing Blu-ray Disc, DVD, or CD
discs in this player. Also, refer to rest of this user
manual for additional information on playback
restrictions.
English
5
Safety Information
Be careful not to damage the disc because the
data on these discs is highly vulnerable to the
environment.
• Do not keep under direct sunlight.
• Keep in a cool ventilated area.
• Store vertically.
• Keep in a clean protection jacket.
• If you move your player suddenly from a cold
place to a warm place, condensation may occur
on the operating parts and lens and cause
abnormal disc playback. If this occurs, unplug
the player, wait for two hours, and then connect
the plug to the power outlet. Then, insert the
disc, and try to play back again.
• Be sure to remove the disc and turn off the
player after use.
• Disconnect the AC power cord from the AC
outlet when you don’t intend to use the player
for long periods of time.
• To clean a disc, wipe it in a straight
line from the inside to the outside of
the disc.
• Do not expose the player to any
liquid.
• When the AC plug is connected to a wall outlet,
the player will still draw power (standby mode)
when it is turned off.
• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such
as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
• The main plug is used as a disconnect device
and shall stay readily operable at any time.
02
Disc Storage
Contents
KEY FEATURES
2
2
Blu-ray Disc Features
Blu-ray Disc Player Features
SAFETY INFORMATION
3
4
4
4
4
Warning
Precautions
Important Safety Instructions
Disc Storage & Management
Disc Handling
GETTING STARTED
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
14
14
15
16
17
17
Before using the User Manual
Disc Types and Contents your player can play
Disc types your player cannot play
Blu-ray Disc Compatibility
Disc Types
Region Code
Copyright
Supported File Formats
Logos of Discs the player can play
Accessories
Front Panel
Rear Panel
Remote Control
Tour of the Remote Control
CONNECTIONS
18
18
Connecting to a TV
Case 1 : Connecting to a TV with an HDMI Cable
- Best Quality (Recommended)
Case 2 : Connecting to a TV with an Audio/Video
cable - Good Quality
19
6
English
20
20
22
22
23
Connecting to an Audio System
Case 1 : Connecting to an Audio System
(HDMI supported AV receiver) - Best Quality
(Recommended)
Case 2 : Connecting to an Audio System
(AV receiver with Dolby Digital or DTS decoder) Better Quality
Case 3 : Connecting to an Audio System
(Stereo Amplifier) - Good Quality
Connecting to the Network
Cable Network
Wireless Network
24
25
26
26
26
26
26
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
30
30
30
31
31
34
35
Initial Settings
Accessing the Settings Menu
Display
TV Aspect
Smart Hub Screen Size
BD Wise (Samsung Players only)
Resolution
HDMI Color Format
Movie Frame (24Fs)
HDMI Deep Color
Still Mode
Progressive Mode
Audio
Digital Output
PCM Downsampling
Dynamic Range Control
Downmixing Mode
Network
Network Settings
Network Status
BD-LIVE Internet Connection
21
21
SETUP
English
ENGLISH
CONNECTIONS
7
Contents
8
English
SETUP
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
39
System
Initial Settings
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)
BD Data Management
Time Zone
DivX® Video On Demand
Reset
Language
Security
BD Parental Rating
DVD Parental Rating
Change Password
General
Front Display
Network Remote Control
Support
Software Upgrade
Contact Samsung
BASIC FUNCTIONS
40
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
Playing a Video
Playback
Disc Structure
Using the Disc Menu/Title Menu/Popup Menu
Using the Disc Menu
Using the Title Menu
Playing the Title List
Using the Popup Menu
Using the Search and Skip Functions
Searching for a Desired Scene
Skipping Chapters
Slow Motion Play/Step Motion Play
Slow Motion Play
Step Motion Play
42
42
42
43
43
43
43
44
44
44
45
45
NETWORK SERVICES
49
49
52
54
56
56
56
58
58
Using Smart Hub
Starting Smart Hub for the First Time
The Settings Menu - BLUE (D)
The Edit Mode Menu - YELLOW (C)
The Sort Menu - GREEN (B)
Samsung Apps
For Pay Apps
BD-LIVE™
Using the AllShare Function
APPENDIX
59
61
62
63
Troubleshooting
Repairs
Index
Specifications
English
ENGLISH
45
46
46
47
47
47
48
Using the TOOLS button
Moving to a Desired Scene Directly
Repeating the Title or Chapter
Repeating a Section
Changing to Full Screen
Selecting the Picture Settings
Selecting the Audio Language
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Changing the Camera Angle
Setting BONUSVIEW
Listening to Music
Buttons on the Remote Control used for Music
Playback
Playing an Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3
Repeat an Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3
Playlist
Playing back Pictures
Playing a JPEG files
Using the TOOLS button
Playing back a USB Storage Device
BASIC FUNCTIONS
9
Getting Started
Before using the User Manual
Disc Types and Contents your player can play
Content
Logo
Icon
Definition
h
z
Indicates a function available on a BD-ROM or BD-RE/-R disc recorded in the BD-RE
format.
Z
y
Indicates a function available on a DVD-VIDEO or recorded DVD+RW/
DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R discs that have been recorded and finalized.
x
Indicates a function available in a CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R disc or a USB
storage media containing DivX, MKV, MP4 contents.
o
Indicates a function available on an audio CD-RW/-R (CD-DA format).
-
w
Indicates a function available in a CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R disc or a USB
storage media containing MP3 or WMA contents.
-
G
Indicates a function available in a CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R disc or a USB
storage media containing JPEG contents.
VIDEO
-
MUSIC
PHOTO
✎
NOTE
▪ The player may not play certain CD-RW/-R and DVD-R because of the disc type or recording conditions.
▪ If a DVD-RW/-R disc has not been recorded properly in DVD video format, it will not be playable.
▪ Your player will not play content that has been recorded on a DVD-R at a bit-rate that exceeds 10 Mbps.
▪ Your player will not play content that has been recorded on a BD-R or USB device at a bit rate that exceeds 30 Mbps.
Disc types your player cannot play
• HD DVD
• DVD-ROM/PD/MVDisc, etc
10
English
• DVD-RAM
• Super Audio CD
(except CD layer)
• DVD-RW(VR mode)
• 3.9 GB DVD-R Disc for
Authoring.
• CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/
CD-G/CD-I/LD
(CD-Gs play audio only,
not graphics.)
Disc Types
▪ Some commercial discs and DVDs discs purchased
outside your region may not play on this player.
BD-ROM
▪ Playback may not work for some types of discs, or
when you use specific operations, such as angle
change and aspect ratio adjustment. Information
about the discs is written in detail on the disc box.
Please refer to this if necessary.
▪ Do not allow the disc to become dirty or scratched.
Fingerprints, dirt, dust, scratches or deposits of
cigarette smoke on the recording surface may make
it impossible to use the disc for playback.
▪ When you play a BD-J title, loading may take longer
than a normal title or some functions may perform
slowly.
▪ This player may not respond to all operating
commands because some Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and
CD discs allow specific or limited operation and
provide only certain features during playback.
Please note that this is not a defect in the player.
▪ Samsung cannot guarantee that this player will play
every disc bearing the Blu-ray Disc, DVD or CD logo
because disc formats evolve, and problems and
errors may occur during the creation of Blu-ray Disc,
DVD, and CD software and/or the manufacture of
discs.
Please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center
if you have questions or encounter difficulty when
playing Blu-ray Disc, DVD, or CD discs in this player.
Also, refer to rest of this user manual for additional
information on playback restrictions.
Getting Started
NOTE
03
✎
Blu-ray ROM discs can only be played back.
This player can play back pre-recorded
commercial BD-ROM discs.
BD-RE/-R
Blu-ray RE/-R discs can be recorded on and
played back.
This player can play back a BD-RE/-R disc
recorded by other compatible Blu-ray Disc
recorders.
DVD-VIDEO
• This player can play back pre-recorded
commercial DVDs (DVD-VIDEO discs) with
movies.
• When switching from the first layer to the
second layer of a dual-layered DVD-VIDEO disc,
there may be momentary distortion in the image
and sound. This is not a malfunction of the
player.
DVD-RW/-R/+R
This player can play back a DVD-RW/-R/+R disc
recorded and finalized with a DVD video recorder.
The ability to play back may depend on recording
conditions.
DVD+RW
Blu-ray Disc Compatibility
Blu-ray Disc is a new and evolving format.
Accordingly, disc compatibility issues are possible.
Not all discs are compatible and not every disc will
play back. For additional information, refer to the
Compliance and Compatibility Notice section of
this user manual.
• This player can play back a DVD+RW disc
recorded with a DVD Video recorder. The
ability to play back may depend on recording
conditions.
Audio CD (CD-DA)
• This player can play back CD-DA format audio
CD-RW/-R discs.
• The player may not be able to play some
CD-RW/-R discs due to the condition of the
recording.
English
11
Getting Started
CD-RW/-R
Region Code
• Use a 700MB (80 minute) CD-RW/-R disc.
If possible, do not use an 800MB (90 minute) or
larger disc, as the disc may not play back.
• If the CD-RW/-R disc was not recorded as a
closed session, you may experience delays
when playing back the beginning of the disc or
all recorded files may not play.
• Some CD-RW/-R discs may not play on this
player, depending on the device which was
used to burn them. For contents recorded on
CD-RW/-R media from CDs for your personal
use, playability may vary depending on the
contents and discs.
Both players and discs are coded by region.
These regional codes must match for a disc to
play. If the codes do not match, the disc will not
play.
The Region Number for this player is displayed on
the rear panel of the player.
Region
Code
Area
A
North America, Central America,
South America, Korea, Japan,
Taiwan, Hong Kong and South
East Asia.
B
Europe, Greenland, French
territories, Middle East, Africa,
Australia and New Zealand.
C
India, China, Russia, Central
and South Asia.
1
The U.S., U.S. territories and
Canada
2
Europe, Japan, the Middle East,
Egypt, South Africa, Greenland
3
Taiwan, Korea, the Philippines,
Indonesia, Hong Kong
4
Mexico, South America,
Central America, Australia,
New Zealand, Pacific Islands,
Caribbean
▪ Some AVCHD format discs may not play, depending
on the recording condition.
AVCHD format discs need to be finalized.
5
Russia, Eastern Europe, India,
most of Africa, North Korea,
Mongolia
▪ “x.v.Color” offers a wider color range than normal
DVD camcorder discs.
6
China
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High
Definition)
• This player can play back AVCHD format discs.
These discs are normally recorded and used in
camcorders.
• The AVCHD format is a high definition digital
video camera format.
• The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format compresses
images with greater efficiency than the
conventional image compressing format.
• Some AVCHD discs use the “x.v.Color” format.
This player can play back AVCHD discs that use
“x.v.Color” format.
• “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
• “AVCHD” and the AVCHD logo are trademarks
of Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. and
Sony Corporation.
✎
Disc Type
Blu-ray Disc
DVD-VIDEO
NOTE
▪ Some DivX, MKV and MP4 format discs may not
play, depending on the video resolution and frame
rate condition.
Copyright
© 2011 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
All rights reserved; No part or whole of this user’s
manual may be reproduced or copied without the
prior written permission of Samsung Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
12
English
03
Supported File Formats
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Your player supports USB storage media, MP3 players, digital cameras, and USB card readers.
The player does not support folder or file names longer than 128 characters.
Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player.
Your player supports the FAT16, FAT32, and NTFS files systems.
Connect USB devices directly to the player’s USB port. Connecting through a USB cable may cause
compatibility problems.
Inserting more than one memory device into a multi-card reader may cause the reader to operate
improperly.
The player does not support the PTP protocol.
Do not disconnect a USB device during a “loading” process.
The bigger the image resolution, the longer the image takes to display.
This player cannot play MP3 files with DRM (Digital Rights Management) downloaded from commercial
sites.
External HDD device is not supported.
Your player only supports the video that is under 30fps (frame rate).
Video File Support
File Extension
Container
Video Codec
DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0
*.avi
AVI
MP4v3
H.264 BP/MP/HP
Audio Codec
MP3
AC3
DTS
WMA
PCM
*.mkv
MKV
MP3
AC3
DTS
*.mp4
WMV (wmv9)
MP4
VC-1 AP
VC-1 SM
MP4 (mp4v)
H.264 BP/MP/HP
MPEG1
*.mpg
*.mpeg
PS
MPEG2
H.264 BP/MP/HP
MPEG2
*.ts
*.tp
*.trp
TS
H.264
VC-1
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
H.264 BP/MP/HP
*.wmv
1920x1080
1920x1080
VC-1 AP
DivX 5.1/6.0
Resolution
1920x1080
WMA
AAC
MP1, 2
AC3
DTS
AC3
AAC
MP3
DD+
HE-AAC
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
1920x1080
English
13
Getting Started
Notes on the USB connection
Getting Started
Music File Support
File Extension
Container
Audio Codec
Support Range
*.mp3
MP3
MP3
-
*.wma
WMA
WMA
Compliant with WMA version 10
* Sampling rates (in kHz) - 8, 11, 16, 22, 32, 44.1, 48
* Bit rates - All bit-rates in the range 5kbps to 384kbps
Logos of Discs the player can play
Blu-ray Disc
DTS-HD Master Audio
Dolby TrueHD
PAL broadcast System in
U.K., France, Germany, etc
DivX
BD-LIVE
Java
Accessories
Check for the supplied accessories below.
14
English
HDMI cable
Batteries for Remote Control (AAA Size)
User Manual
Remote Control
03
Front Panel
Getting Started
b c
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
DISC TRAY
Opens to accept a disc.
REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR
Detects signals from the remote control.
DISPLAY
Displays the playing status, time, etc.
OPEN/CLOSE BUTTON
Opens and closes the disc tray.
STOP BUTTON
Stops disc playback.
PLAY/PAUSE BUTTON
Plays a disc or pauses playback.
POWER BUTTON
Turns the player on and off.
8
USB HOST
You can connect a USB memory flash stick here and use it as storage when
the player is connected to BD-LIVE. You can also use the USB Host for software
upgrades and MP3/JPEG/DivX/MKV/MP4 playback.
✎
NOTE
▪ You can perform software upgrades using the USB Host jack with a USB memory flash stick only.
▪ When the player displays the Blu-ray Disc menu, you cannot start the movie by pressing the Play button on the player
or the remote. To play the movie, you must select Play Movie or Start in the disc menu, and then press the ENTER
button.
English
15
Getting Started
Rear Panel
b c
1
WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER
Connect the optional Wireless LAN Adapter (WIS09ABGN) here to use a Wireless
network.
2
LAN
Use for network based services (See pages 49~58), BD-LIVE, and software
upgrades using a network connection.
3
HDMI OUT
Using an HDMI cable, connect this HDMI output terminal to the HDMI input terminal
on your TV for the best quality picture or to your AV receiver for the best quality
sound.
4
VIDEO OUT
Connects to the video input of external devices using a video cable.
5
AUDIO OUT
Connects to the audio input of external devices using audio cables.
6
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
Connects to a AV receiver.
16
English
03
Remote Control
Use to enter the disc menu.
Turn the player on and off.
Use to enter the popup menu/title menu.
These buttons are used both for menus
on the player and also several Blu-ray Disc
functions.
Press numeric buttons to operate options.
Press to switch the Blu-ray Disc/DVD’s
subtitle language.
Use to display the playback information
during playing a Blu-ray Disc/DVDs.
Press to skip backwards or forwards.
Use to access various audio functions on a
disc (Blu-ray Disc/DVD).
Press to pause a disc.
Press to search a disc backwards or
forwards.
Press to play a disc.
Press to stop a disc.
Press to move to the home menu.
Press to use Tools menu.
Use to select menu items and change
menu value.
Return to the previous menu.
Press to exit the menu.
Press to use Smart Hub.
Press to Search contents.
Installing batteries
✎
!
NOTE
▪ If the remote does not operate properly:
• Check the polarity +/– of the batteries.
• Check if the batteries are drained.
• Check if the remote sensor is blocked by
obstacles.
• Check if there is any fluorescent lighting nearby.
CAUTION
▪ Dispose of batteries according to local environmental
regulations. Do not put them in the household trash.
English
17
Getting Started
Tour of the Remote Control
Connections
Connecting to a TV
Case 1 : Connecting to a TV with an HDMI Cable - Best Quality
(Recommended)
1. Using an HDMI cable, connect the HDMI OUT terminal on the rear of the player to the HDMI IN
terminal of your TV.
2. Turn on the player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the HDMI signal from the player appears on
your TV screen.
HDMI cable
✎
NOTE
▪ An HDMI cable outputs digital video/audio, so you don’t need to connect an audio cable.
▪ If the player is connected to your TV in the HDMI 720p, 1080i, or 1080p output mode, you must use a High speed
(category 2) HDMI cable.
▪ HDMI outputs only a pure digital signal to the TV.
If your TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), random noise appears on the screen.
▪ Depending on your TV, certain HDMI output resolutions may not work. Please refer to the user manual of your TV.
▪ When you connect the player to the TV using the HDMI cable for the first time or to a new TV, the HDMI output
resolution will be automatically set to the highest supported by the TV.
▪ A long HDMI cable may cause a screen noise. If this occurs, set Deep Color to Off in the menu.
▪ If you use HDMI-to-DVI cable to connect to your display device, you must also connect the AV Out or Digital Audio Out
to your display device or an audio sytem to hear audio.
▪ If both HDMI and Video out are connected at the same time, only the HDMI signal is outputed.
18
English
Case 2 : Connecting to a TV with an Audio/Video cable - Good Quality
04
1. Using an Audio/Video cable, connect the VIDEO OUT (yellow) / AUDIO OUT (red and white)
terminals on the rear of the player to the VIDEO IN (yellow) / AUDIO IN (red and white) terminals of
your TV.
Connections
2. Turn on the player and TV.
3. Press the input selector on your TV remote control until the “VIDEO” signal from the player appears
on the TV screen.
Audio/Video cable
(not included)
Red
✎
White
Yellow
NOTE
▪ Noise may be generated if the audio cable is placed too close to the power cable.
▪ If you want to connect to an AV receiver, please refer to the AV receiver connection pages. (See pages 20~21)
▪ The number and position of the input terminals may vary depending on your TV set. Please refer to the user manual of
your TV.
!
CAUTION
▪ Do not connect the player to your TV through a VCR. Video signals fed through VCRs may be affected by copyright
protection systems and the picture will be distorted on the television.
English
19
Connections
Connecting to an Audio System
• Please turn the volume down when you turn on the AV receiver. A sudden loud sound may cause
damage to the speakers and your ears.
• Please set the audio format according to the capabilities of your AV receiver. (See pages 28~30)
• The position of HDMI input terminals may vary depending on your AV receiver. Please refer to the
user manual of your AV receiver.
Case 1 : Connecting to an Audio System (HDMI supported AV receiver)
- Best Quality (Recommended)
1. Using an HDMI cable, connect the HDMI OUT terminal on the rear of the player to the HDMI IN
terminal of your AV receiver.
2. Using an HDMI cable, connect the HDMI OUT terminal of the AV receiver to the HDMI IN terminal of
your TV.
3. Turn on the player, TV, and AV receiver.
4. Press the input select button of the AV receiver and TV to select the external input to hear sound
from the player. Refer to your AV receiver’s user manual to set the AV receiver’s audio input.
HDMI cable
HDMI cable
20
English
2. Using the video signal cable(s), connect the
HDMI or VIDEO OUT terminals on the rear of
the player to the HDMI or VIDEO IN terminal
of your TV. (See pages 18~19)
3. Turn on the player, TV, and AV receiver.
4. Press the input select button of the AV receiver
to select the external input and hear sound
from the player. Refer to your AV receiver’s
user manual to set the AV receiver’s audio
input.
5. Press the input selector on your TV remote
control to select the video source (HDMI or
Video.)
Case 2 : Optical cable
(not included)
Red
✎
1. Using the audio cables, connect the AUDIO
OUT (red and white) terminals on the rear of
the player to the AUDIO IN (red and white)
terminals of your Stereo Amplifier.
2. Using the video signal cable(s), connect the
HDMI or VIDEO OUT terminals on the rear of
the player to the HDMI or VIDEO IN terminal
of your TV. (See pages 18~19)
3. Turn on the player, TV and Stereo Amplifier
4. Press the input select button of the Stereo
Amplifier to select the external input in order
to hear sound from the player. Refer to your
Stereo Amplifiers user manual to set the
Stereo Amplifier’s audio input.
5. Press the input selector on your TV remote
control to select the video source (HDMI or
Video.)
Case 3 : Audio cable
(not included)
White
NOTE
▪ If you use the Digital Audio connection described in Case 2, you will hear only front two speakers with Digital Output
setting as PCM.
English
21
Connections
1. Using an optical cable, connect the DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) terminal on the
rear of the player to the DIGITAL AUDIO IN
(OPTICAL) terminal of your AV receiver.
Case 3 : Connecting to an Audio
System (Stereo Amplifier)
- Good Quality
04
Case 2 : Connecting to an Audio
System (AV receiver with Dolby
Digital or DTS decoder) - Better
Quality
Connections
Connecting to the Network
This player lets you use network based services (See pages 49~58) such as Smart Hub and BD-LIVE,
and download software upgrades when it is connected to a network. We recommend using an AP (Access
Point) or IP router for the connection. For more information on router connections, refer to the user
manual of the router or contact the router manufacturer for technical assistance.
Cable Network
1. Using the Direct LAN Cable (UTP cable), connect the LAN terminal of the player to the LAN terminal
of your modem or router.
2. Set the network options. See pages 31~35
Router
Broadband modem
(with integrated router)
Or
Broadband modem
Broadband
service
Broadband
service
Networking with PC for
AllShare function
✎
NOTE
▪ Internet access to Samsung’s software update server may not be allowed, depending on the router you use or your
ISP’s policy. For more information, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider).
▪ For DSL users, please use a router to make a network connection.
▪ To use the AllShare function, you must connect your PC to your network as shown in the figure. The connection can be
wired or wireless.
22
English
04
Wireless Network
1. A wireless AP/IP router and the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is required to make a wireless
network connection. Connect the Wireless LAN adapter (not included) to the Wireless LAN Adapter
jack on the rear panel of the player. See the diagram below.
2. To Set the network options. See pages 31~35.
Broadband
service
Networking with PC
for AllShare function
✎
Wireless IP sharer
Wireless LAN Adapter
(not included)
NOTE
▪ Use only the Samsung wireless LAN adapter with this player. (Model name : WIS09ABGN).
Do not use this wireless adapter with any third-party players.
To purchase the Samsung wireless LAN adapter, visit your Samsung retailer.
▪ You must use a wireless IP sharer that supports IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n. (n is recommended for stable operation of the
wireless network.)
▪ Wireless LAN, by its nature, may cause interference, depending on the operating conditions (AP performance, distance,
obstacles, interference by other radio devices, etc).
▪ Set the wireless IP sharer to Infrastructure mode. Ad-hoc mode is not supported.
▪ The player supports only the following wireless security key protocols :
WEP (OPEN/SHARED), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
▪ Due to changes in WiFi policy, this player cannot support the TKIP encryption method in the 802.11n mode.
▪ To use the AllShare function, you must connect your PC to your network as shown in the figure. The connection can be
wired or wireless.
English
23
Connections
You can connect to network with a Wireless IP sharer (a router or a modem).
Setup
Initial Settings
• Home Menu
My Contents
1. Turn on your TV after connecting the player.
When you connect the player to a TV for the
first time, player turns on automatically and
the Initial Settings
g screen appears.
pp
Videos
Photos
Music
My Devices
Internet
Settings
Initial Settings | On-Screen Language
Select a language for the on-screen displays.
Nederlands
English
Suomi
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
한국어
Norsk
Polski
Português
Русский
Español
Svenska
Türkçe
m Move " Enter
2. Press the ▲▼◄►
▲▼◄► buttons to select the
desired language, and then press the ENTER
button.
3. Press the ENTER button to select Start.
4. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired
TV Aspect Ratio, and then press the ENTER
button. (See page 26)
5. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired
Network Settings : Wired, Wireless (General),
WPS(PBC) or One Foot Connection, and
then press the ENTER button. If you do not
know the details of your Network Settings,
press the BLUE (D) button on your remote
instead to skip Network Settings here, finish
the Initial Settings, and go to the Home menu.
If you selected a Network Setting, go to
pages 31~35 for more information about the
Network settings. When done, go to Step 6.
6. The Home menu appears. (For more
information about the Home menu, please
see page 25.)
24
English
d WPS(PBC)
✎
NOTE
▪ When the player is connected to the TV for the first
time, the player turns on automatically. This is not
malfunction.
▪ The Home menu will not appear if you do not
configure the initial settings except as noted below.
▪ If you press the BLUE (D) button during the network
setup, you can access the Home menu even if the
network setup is not completed yet.
▪ If you want to display the Initial Setting screen again
to make changes, select the Reset option.
(See page 36)
▪ If you use an HDMI cable to connect the player to an
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)-compliant Samsung TV and
1.) You have set the Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) feature
to On in both the TV and the player and 2.) You have
set the TV to a language supported by the player,
the player will select that language as the preferred
language automatically.
▪ If you leave the player in the stop mode for more
than 5 minutes without using it, a screen saver will
appear on your TV. If the player is left in the screen
saver mode for more than 20 minutes, the power
will automatically turn off.
4. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired
item, and then press the ENTER button.
3
2
4
1
MENU Button : Press to move to the Home menu.
2
RETURN Button : Return to the previous menu.
3
ENTER / DIRECTION Button :
Move the cursor or select an item.
Activate the currently selected item.
Confirm a setting.
4
EXIT Button : Press to exit the current menu.
3. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired
submenu, and then press the ENTER button.
Setup
1
2. Press the ◄► buttons to select Settings,
and then press the ENTER button.
05
Accessing the Settings Menu
5. Press the EXIT button to exit the menu.
✎
NOTE
▪ When the player is connected to a network, select
Smart Hub from the Home menu.
Download the desired content from Samsung Apps.
(See pages 56~58)
▪ The access steps may differ depending on the menu
you selected.
▪ The OSD (On Screen Display) may change in this
player after you upgrade the software version.
To access the Settings menu and sub-menus,
follow these steps:
1. Press the POWER button.
The Home Menu appears.
• Home Menu
My Contents
Videos
Photos
2
Music
3
My Devices
Internet
Settings
1
4
d WPS(PBC)
1
Selects My Devices
Devices.
2
Selects My Contents.
3
Selects Internet.
4
Selects Settings.
5
Displays the buttons available.
5
English
25
Setup
Display
You can configure various display options such as
the TV Aspect Ratio, Resolution, etc.
TV Aspect
Depending on the type of television you have, you
may want to adjust the screen size setting.
• 16:9 Original : Select when you connect the
player to a 16:9 TV screen. The player will
display all content in its original aspect ratio.
Content formatted in 4:3 will be displayed with
black bars on the left and right.
• 16:9 Full : Select when you connect the player
to a 16:9 TV screen. All content will fill the
full screen. Content formatted in 4:3 will be
stretched.
• 4:3 Letter Box : Select when you connect the
player to a 4:3 TV screen. The player will display
all content in its original aspect ratio. Content
formatted in 16:9 will be displayed with black
bars on the top and bottom.
• 4:3 Pan-Scan : Select when you connect the
player to a 4:3 TV screen. 16:9 content will have
the extreme left and right portions cut off.
✎ NOTE
▪ Depending on the disc type, some aspect ratios may
not be available.
▪ If you select an aspect ratio and option which is
different than the aspect ratio of your TV screen,
then the picture might appear to be distorted.
▪ If you select the 16:9 Original, your TV may display
4:3 Pillarbox (black bars on sides of picture).
Smart Hub Screen Size
Set the Smart Hub Screen to the optimal size.
• Size 1 : Smart Hub screen size will be smaller
than default. You may see some black on sides
of screen.
• Size 2 : This is the default setting for Smart
Hub. The player displays the normal Smart Hub
screen size.
• Size 3 : This will display a larger Smart Hub
screen size. The image may be too large for
your TV screen.
26
English
BD Wise (Samsung Players only)
BD Wise is Samsung’s latest inter-connectivity
feature.
When you connect a Samsung player and a
Samsung TV with BD Wise to each other via
HDMI, and BD Wise is on in both the player and
TV, the player outputs video at the video resolution
and frame rate of the Blu-ray Disc/DVDs.
• Off : The output resolution stays fixed at the
resolution you set previously in the Resolution
menu, regardless of the resolution of the disc.
See Resolution below.
• On : The player outputs video at the original
resolution and frame rate of the Blu-ray Disc/
DVDs.
✎ NOTE
▪ When BD Wise is on, the Resolution setting
automatically defaults to BD Wise and BD Wise
appears in the Resolution menu.
▪ If the player is connected to a device that does not
support BD Wise, you can not use the BD Wise function.
▪ For proper operation of BD Wise, set the BD Wise
menu of both the player and the TV to On.
Resolution
Lets you set the output resolution of the HDMI
video signal to Auto, 1080p, 1080i, 720p,
576p/480p or 576i/480i. The number indicates
the number of lines of video per frame. The i
and p indicate interlaced and progressive scan,
respectively. The more lines, the higher the quality.
• Auto : Automatically sets the output resolution
to the connected TV’s maximum resolution.
• BD Wise : Automatically sets the resolution to
the resolution of the Blu-ray Disc/DVDs if you
have connected the player via HDMI to a TV
with the BD Wise feature. (The BD Wise menu
item appears only if BD Wise is set to On. See
BD Wise above.)
• 1080p : Outputs 1080 lines of progressive
video.
• 1080i : Outputs 1080 lines of interlaced video.
• 720p : Outputs 720 lines of progressive video.
• 576p/480p : Outputs 576/480 lines of
progressive video.
• 576i/480i : Outputs 576/480 lines of interlaced
video.
05
Resolution according to the output mode
HDMI / connected
Output
Setup
HDMI / not connected
HDMI Mode
Blu-ray Disc
VIDEO Mode
E-contents/Digital contents
BD Wise
Resolution of Blu-ray Disc
1080p@60F
-
Auto
Max. Resolution of TV input
Max. Resolution of TV input
-
1080p@60F
1080p@60F
1080p@60F
-
Movie Frame : Auto (24Fs)
1080p@24F
1080p@24F
-
1080i
1080i
1080i
576i/480i
720p
720p
720p
576i/480i
576p/480p
576p/480p
576p/480p
576i/480i
576i/480i
-
-
576i/480i
• DVD playback
HDMI / connected
HDMI / not connected
HDMI Mode
VIDEO Mode
BD Wise
576i/480i
-
Auto
Max. Resolution of TV input
-
1080p@60F
1080p@60F
-
1080i
1080i
576i/480i
Output
Setup
✎
720p
720p
576i/480i
576p/480p
576p/480p
576i/480i
576i/480i
-
576i/480i
NOTE
▪ If the TV you connected to the player does not
support Movie Frame or the resolution you selected,
the message “If no pictures are shown after
selecting ‘Yes’, please wait for 15 seconds to return
to the previous resolution. Do you want to change
the resolution?” appears. If you select Yes, the
TV’s screen will go blank for 15 seconds, and then
the resolution will revert to the previous resolution
automatically.
▪ If the screen stays blank after you have changed the
resolution, remove all discs, and then press and hold
) button on the front of the player for
the STOP (
more than 5 seconds. All settings are restored to the
factory default. Follow the steps on the previous page
to access each mode and select the Display Setup
that your TV will support.
▪ When the factory default settings are restored, all
stored user BD data is deleted.
▪ The Blu-ray Disc must have the 24 frame feature for
the player to use the Movie Frame (24Fs) mode.
English
27
Setup
• Blu-ray Disc/E-contents/Digital Contents playback
Setup
HDMI Color Format
Still Mode
Lets you set the color space format for HDMI
output to match the capabilities of the connected
device (TV, monitor, etc).
• Auto : Automatically sets the player to the
optimum format supported by your device.
• YCbCr (4:4:4) : If your TV supports the YCbCr
color space via HDMI, select this to output the
normal YCbCr color gamut.
• RGB (Standard) : Select to output the normal
RGB color gamut.
• RGB (Enhanced) : If you have connected the
player to a DVI display device such as a monitor,
select this to output the enhanced RGB color
gamut.
Lets you set the type of picture the player displays
when you pause DVD playback.
• Auto : Automatically shows the best still picture
depending on the content.
• Frame : Select when pausing a scene with a
little action.
• Field : Select when pausing a scene with a lot
of action.
Movie Frame (24Fs)
Setting the Movie Frame (24Fs) feature to Auto
allows you to adjust the player’s HDMI output to
24 frames per second for improved picture quality.
You can enjoy the Movie Frame (24Fs) feature only
on a TV supporting this frame rate. You can select
Movie Frame only when the player is in the HDMI
1080i or 1080p output resolution modes.
• Auto : Movie Frame (24Fs) functions work.
• Off : Movie Frame (24Fs) functions are off.
HDMI Deep Color
Lets you output video from the HDMI OUT jack
with Deep Color. Deep Color provides more
accurate color reproduction with greater color
depth.
• Auto : The player outputs video with Deep Color
to a connected TV which supports HDMI Deep
Color.
• Off : The picture is output without Deep Color.
28
English
Progressive Mode
Lets you improve picture quality when viewing
DVDs.
• Auto : Select to have the player automatically
select the best picture quality for the DVD you’re
watching.
• Video : Select for the best picture quality from
concert or TV show DVDs.
Audio
Digital Output
You set the Digital Output to match the capabilities
of the AV receiver you’ve connected to the player :
• PCM : Choose if you have connected an HDMI
supported AV receiver.
• Bitstream (Unprocessed) : Select if you have
connected an HDMI supported AV receiver
with Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio
decoding capabilities.
• Bitstream (Re-encoded DTS) : Choose if you
have connected an AV receiver using a Digital
Optical input that can decode DTS.
• Bitstream (Re-encoded Dolby D) : Select if
you don’t have an HDMI supported AV receiver,
but have a AV receiver with Dolby Digital
decoding capabilities.
For more details, please refer to the digital output
selection table. (See page 29)
Bitstream
(Unprocessed)
PCM
Bitstream
(Re-encoded
DTS)
Bitstream
(Re-encoded
Dolby D)
HDMI
supported
AV receiver
Optical
HDMI
supported
AV receiver
Optical
HDMI supported HDMI supported
AV receiver or AV receiver or
Optical
Optical
PCM
Up to 7.1ch
PCM 2ch
PCM
PCM 2ch
DTS re-encoded
Dolby Digital
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch Dolby Digital Dolby Digital DTS re-encoded
Dolby Digital
Plus
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch Dolby TrueHD Dolby Digital DTS re-encoded
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
DTS-HD HRA
PCM 2ch
DTS-HD MA
PCM
Audio Stream
Dolby Digital
on DVD
DTS
Connection
Audio Stream
on Blu-ray Dolby TrueHD
Disc
DTS
Definition for
Blu-ray Disc
Any
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital DTS re-encoded
Plus
DTS
DTS re-encoded
PCM 2ch DTS-HD HRA
DTS
DTS re-encoded
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
DTS
DTS re-encoded
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch
PCM 2ch Dolby Digital Dolby Digital
PCM 2ch
DTS
DTS
Decodes the main feature
audio and BONUSVIEW
audio stream together
into PCM audio and adds
Navigation Sound Effects.
DTS
DTS-HD MA
Outputs only the main
feature audio stream so that
your AV receiver can decode
the audio bitstream.
You will not hear
BONUSVIEW audio or
Navigation Sound Effects.
PCM 2ch
Dolby Digital
DTS
Decodes the main
feature audio and
BONUSVIEW audio
stream together
into PCM audio and
adds Navigation
Sound Effects, then
re-encodes the
PCM audio into DTS
bitstream.
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
Re-encoded
Dolby Digital *
PCM 2ch
Dolby Digital
DTS
Decodes the main
feature audio and
BONUSVIEW audio
stream together
into PCM audio and
adds Navigation
Sound Effects, then
re-encodes the PCM
audio into Dolby
digital bitstream or
PCM.
* If the Source Stream is 2ch, “Re-encoded Dolby D” Setting are not applied. Output will be LPCM 2ch.
Blu-ray Discs may include three audio streams :
- Main Feature Audio : The audio soundtrack of the main feature.
- BONUSVIEW audio : An additional soundtrack such as the director or actor’s commentary.
- Navigation Sound Effects : When you choose some menu navigation, Navigation Sound Effects may
sound. Navigation Sound Effects are different on each Blu-ray Disc.
English
29
Setup
Setup
05
Digital Output Selection
Setup
✎
NOTE
Dynamic Range Control
▪ Be sure to select the correct Digital Output or you
will hear no sound or just loud noise.
You can listen at low volumes, but still hear dialog
clearly.
This is only active if your player detects a Dolby
Digital signal.
• Auto : The Dynamic Range Control will be set
automatically based on the information provided
by the Dolby TrueHD Soundtrack.
• Off : You can enjoy the movie with the standard
Dynamic Range.
• On : When Movie soundtracks are played at low
volume or through smaller speakers, the system
can apply appropriate compression to make
low-level content more intelligible and prevent
dramatic passages from getting too loud.
▪ If the HDMI device (AV receiver, TV) is not compatible
with compressed formats (Dolby digital, DTS), the
audio signal outputs as PCM.
▪ Regular DVDs do not have BONUSVIEW audio and
Navigation Sound Effects.
▪ Some Blu-ray Discs do not have BONUSVIEW audio
and Navigation Sound Effects.
▪ This Digital Output setup does not effect the analog
(L/R) audio or HDMI audio output to your TV.
It effects the optical and HDMI audio output when
your player is connected to a AV receiver.
▪ If you play MPEG audio soundtracks, the audio signal
outputs as PCM regardless of your Digital Output
selections (PCM or Bitstream).
PCM Downsampling
Lets you set 48kHz and 96kHz PCM downsampling on or off.
• Off : Select when the AV receiver connected to
the player is 96kHz compatible.
• On : Select when the AV receiver connected
to the player is not 96kHz compatible. 96kHz
signals will be down converted to 48kHz.
✎
NOTE
▪ Even when PCM Downsampling is set to Off, some
discs will only output downsampled audio through
the optical digital outputs.
HDMI
• If your TV is not compatible with compressed
multi-channel formats (Dolby Digital, DTS), the
player may output PCM 2ch downmixed audio
even though you selected Bitstream (either Reencoded or Unprocessed) in the setup menu.
• If your TV is not compatible with PCM sampling
rates over 48kHz, the player may output 48kHz
downsampled PCM audio even though you set
PCM Downsampling to Off.
30
English
Downmixing Mode
Lets you select how the player will downmix multichannel audio into fewer channels.
• Normal Stereo : Downmixes the multi-channel
audio into two channel stereo. Choose when
connected to equipment that does not support
virtual surround functions such as Dolby Pro
Logic.
• Surround Compatible : Downmixes multichannel audio into surround compatible stereo.
Choose when connected to equipment that
supports virtual surround functions such as
Dolby Pro Logic.
Setup
Before you begin, contact your ISP to find out
if your IP address is static or dynamic. If it is
dynamic, and you are using a wired or wireless
connection, we recommend using the Auto
procedures. If you are using a wireless connection
and your router has the capability, you can use
WPS(PBC) or One Foot Connection.
If your IP address is static, you must use the
manual set up procedure for both wired and
wireless connections.
Wired Network
05
Network
Setting Up a Wired Connection - Auto
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Wired.
Settings
ngs
Network Settings
Display
Audio
Select a network connection type.
Network
Wired
System
Wireless
(General)
Languagee
Security
General
WPS(PBC)
Connect to the network using LAN cable. Please make
sure that the LAN cable is connected.
One Foot
Connection
Support
> Move " Enter ' Return
Network Settings
To begin setting up the network connection for
your player, follow these steps:
1. In the Home menu, press the ◄► buttons
to select the Settings, and then press the
ENTER button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Network, and
then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Network
Settings, and then press the ENTER button.
4. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Wired,
Wireless (General), WPS(PBC) or One Foot
Connection, and then press the ENTER
button.
5. If you have a wired network, go to Wired
Network below. If you have a wireless
network, go to Wireless Network on pages
32~34.
2. Press the ENTER button.
button
The Network Status screen appears. The
player connects to the network after the
network connection is verified.
Setting Up a Wired Connection - Manual
If you have a static IP address or the Auto Setting
does not work, you’ll need to set the Network
Settings values manually.
To view your Network Settings values on most
Windows computers, follow these steps:
■ Windows XP
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom
right of the Windows desktop.
2. In the pop-up menu, click Status.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support
tab.
4. On the Support tab, click the Details button.
The Network settings are displayed.
■ Windows 7
1. Click the Network icon on the bottom right of
the Windows desktop.
2. In the pop-up menu, click Network and
Sharing Center.
English
31
Setup
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Local
Area Connection or Wireless Network
Connection depending on your network
connection.
4. On the Support tab, click the Details button.
The Network settings are displayed.
✎
NOTE
▪ Depending on your Windows version, the information
may differ.
To enter the Network settings into your player,
follow these steps:
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Wired, and
then press the ENTER button.
2. Press the ◄► buttons to select IP Settings,
and then press the ENTER button.
3. On the Network Status screen, select Cancel,
and then press Enter.
Settings
ngs
IP Settings
Display
Audio
Network
System
Languagee
Security
General
IP Mode
Manual
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Manual
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Mode
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
DNS Server
Support
OK
> Move " Enter ' Return
4. Press the ENTER button to select IP Mode.
5. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Manual, and
then press the ENTER button.
6. Press the ▼ button to go to the first entry field
(IP Address).
7. Use the number buttons on your remote to
enter numbers.
8. When done with each field, press the ►
button to move successively to the next field.
You can also use the other arrow buttons to
move up, down, and back.
9. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway values.
32
English
10. Press the ▼ button to go to DNS Mode.
11. Press the ▼ button to go to the first DNS
entry field. Enter the numbers as above.
12. Press the ENTER button to select OK.
The Network Status screen appears. The
player connects to the network after the
network connection is verified.
Wireless Network
You can setup a wireless network three ways:
• Wireless (General)
• Using WPS(PBC)
• One Foot Connection
Wireless (General) includes both Automatic and
Manual setup procedures.
Setting Up the Wireless Network Connection
- Auto
Most wireless networks have an optional security
system that requires devices that access the
network to transmit an encrypted security code
called an Access or Security Key. The Security
Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically a word
or a series of letters and numbers of a specified
length you were asked to enter when you set up
security for your wireless network. If you use this
method of setting up the network connection, and
have a Security Key for your wireless network, you
will have to enter the Pass Phrase during the Auto
setup process.
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Wireless
(General).
Settings
ettings
Network Settings
Display
spla
Select a network connection type.
udio
Audio
Network
ettwo
System
yste
Wired
Language
anguu Wireless
(General)
Security
ecurr
WPS(PBC)
enerr
General
One Foot
uppo Connection
Support
Set up wireless network by selecting your Wireless
Router. You may need to enter security key depending
on the setting of the Wireless Router.
> Move " Enter ' Return
2. Press
P ess the ENTER button.
b tton
When
done, it di
displays
a lilistt off th
the available
Wh d
l
il bl
networks.
On the Security screen, enter your network’s
Pass Phrase. Enter numbers directly using your
remote control.
To select a letter, press the ▲▼◄► buttons to
move the cursor, then press the ENTER button.
Settings
ngs
Display
Audio
Network Settings
Enter security key.
0 entered
Network
System
Languagee
Security
General
Support
a
b
c
d
e
f
1
2
3
g
h
i
j
k
l
4
5
6
m
n
o
p
q
r
7
8
9
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
*
Delete
s
a/A
Space
0
Done
1. Click the Network icon on the bottom right of
the Windows desktop.
2. In the pop-up menu, click Network and
Sharing Center.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Local
Area Connection or Wireless Network
Connection depending on your network
connection.
4. On the Support tab, click the Details button.
The Network settings are displayed.
✎
NOTE
▪ Depending on your Windows version, the information
may differ.
a Previous m Move " Enter ' Return
To enter the Network settings into your player,
follow these steps:
✎
NOTE
▪ You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of
the set up screens you used to set up your router or
modem.
5. When done, press the GREEN (B) button on
your remote or press the ▲▼◄► buttons to
move the cursor to Done, and then press the
ENTER button.
The Network Status screen appears. The
player connects to the network after the
network connection is verified.
1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in the ‘Setting Up
the Wireless Network Connection - Auto’
procedure.
2. When done, press the GREEN (B) button on
your remote or press the ▲▼◄► buttons to
move the cursor to Done, and then press the
ENTER button. The Network Status screen
pp
appears.
Settings
ngs
IP Settings
Display
Audio
Network
System
Setting Up the Wireless Network Connection
- Manual
Languagee
If the Auto Setting does not work, you need to
enter the Network setting values manually.
To view the Network Settings values on most
Windows computers, follow these steps:
Support
Security
General
IP Mode
Manual
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
Manual
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Mode
0 . 0 . 0 . 0
DNS Server
OK
> Move " Enter ' Return
■ Windows XP
3. On the Network Status screen, select Cancel,
and then press Enter.
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom
right of the Windows desktop.
4. Press the ◄► buttons to select IP Settings,
and then press the ENTER button.
2. In the pop-up menu, click Status.
5. Press the ENTER button to select IP Mode.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support
tab.
6. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Manual, and
then press the ENTER button.
4. On the Support tab, click the Details button.
The Network settings are displayed.
7. Press the ▼ button to go to the first entry field
(IP Address).
English
33
Setup
4.
■ Windows 7
05
3. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the desired
network, and then press the ENTER button.
The Security screen appears.
Setup
8. Use the number buttons to enter numbers.
9. When done with each field, press the ►
button to move successively to the next field.
You can also use the other arrow buttons to
move up, down, and back.
10. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway values.
11. Press the ▼ to go to DNS Mode.
12. Press the ▼ button to go to the first DNS
entry field. Enter the numbers as above.
One Foot Connection
You can set up the wireless connection
automatically if you have a Samsung Wireless
Router which supports One Foot Connection. To
connect using the One Foot Connection function,
follow these steps:
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select One Foot
Connection.
Settings
ettings
Network Settings
Display
spla
Select a network connection type.
udio
Audio
13. Press the OK button.
14. The Network Status screen appears. The
player connects to the network after the
network connection is verified.
WPS(PBC)
Network
ettwo
Wired
System
yste
angu Wireless
Language
(General)
Security
ecur
WPS(PBC)
General
enerr
One Foot
uppoo Connection
Support
Connect to the wireless network automatically if your
Wireless Router supports One Foot Connection. Select
tthis connection type after placing the Wireless Router
within 10 inches (25Cm) of Samsung Wireless LAN
w
AAdapter.
> Move " Enter ' Return
The easiest way to set up the wireless network
connection is using the WPS(PBC) function or the
One Foot Connection function.
If your wireless router has a WPS(PBC) button,
follow these steps:
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select WPS(PBC).
(
)
2.. Press the
h ENTER button.
b
3. Place the Samsung Wireless Router within 25
cm (10 inches) of your player to connect.
4. Wait until the connection is automatically
established.
Settings
ettings
Network Settings
Display
spla
Select a network connection type.
udio
Audio
Network
ettwo
System
yste
Network Status
Wired
Language
angu Wireless
(General)
Security
ecurr
WPS(PBC)
enerr
General
One Foot
Support
uppo Connection
C
Connect
to the Wireless Router easily by pressing the
W
WPS(PBC) button. Choose this if your Wireless Router
ssupports Push Button Configuration(PBC).
> Move " Enter ' Return
Check whether a connection to the network and
the Internet have been established.
Settings
ettings
Network Status
Display
spla
MAC Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
udio
Audio
the ENTER button.
2.. Press th
b tt
Network
ettwo
KT_WLAN
System
yste
3. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router
within two minutes. Your player displays the
Network Selection Screen, and automatically
acquires all the network settings values it
needs and connects to your network.
4. The Network Status screen appears. The
player connects to the network after the
network connection is verified.
34
English
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Language
angu Internet is connected successfully.
If you have a problem using any Internet services, contact your Internet service
ecur provider.
Security
General
ener
uppo Network Settings
Support
IP Settings
Retry
OK
<M
Move " Ent
Enter
teer ' Return
✎
NOTE
▪ What is a valid certificate?
When the player uses BD-LIVE to send the disc data
and a request to the server to certify the disc, the
server uses the transmitted data to check if the disc is
valid and sends the certificate back to the player.
▪ The Internet connection may be restricted while you
are using BD-LIVE contents.
NOTE
▪ This function is not available if the HDMI cable does
not support CEC.
▪ If your Samsung TV has an Anynet+ logo, then it
supports the Anynet+ function.
▪ Depending on your TV, certain HDMI output
resolutions may not work.
Please refer to the user manual of your TV.
BD Data Management
Enables you to manage the downloaded contents
you accessed through a Blu-ray disc that supports
the BD-LIVE service and stored on a flash drive.
You can check the device’s information including
the storage size, delete the BD data, or change
the Flash memory device.
BD Data Management Screen Information :
System
Initial Settings
By using the Initial Settings function, you can set
the language, Network Settings, etc.
For more information about the Initial Settings
function, refer to the Initial Settings section of this
user manual.
(See pages 24~39)
Anynet+(HDMI-CEC)
Anynet+ is a convenient function that offers linked
operations with other Samsung players that have
the Anynet+ feature.
To operate this function, connect this player to a
Samsung TV with an HDMI cable.
With Anynet+ on, you can operate this player
using a Samsung TV remote control and start
disc playback simply by pressing the PLAY (
)
button on the TV’s remote control.
For more information, please see the TV user
manual.
• Off : Anynet+ functions will not work.
• On : Anynet+ functions will work.
• Total Size : Total memory size of the device.
• Available Size : Available memory in the device.
✎
NOTE
▪ In the external memory mode, disc playback may
be stopped if you disconnect the USB device in the
middle of playback.
▪ Only those USB devices formatted in FAT file
system (DOS 8.3 volume label) are supported. We
recommend you use USB devices that support USB
2.0 protocol with 4 MB/sec or faster read/write
speed.
▪ The Resume Play function may not work after you
format the storage device.
▪ The total memory available to BD Data Management
may differ, depending on the conditions.
English
35
Setup
Set to allow or prohibit an Internet connection
when you use the BD-LIVE service.
• Allow (All) : The Internet connection is allowed
for all BD-LIVE contents.
• Allow (Valid Only) : The Internet connection is
allowed only for BD-LIVE contents containing a
valid certificate.
• Prohibit : No Internet connection is allowed for
any BD-LIVE content.
✎
05
BD-LIVE Internet Connection
Setup
Security
Time Zone
You can specify the time zone that is applicable to
your area.
Settings
ngs
Display
Time Zone
Audio
Network
System
Languagee
Security
General
GMT + 00:00
Support
London, Lisbon, Casablanca
< Change " Save ' Return
This function works in conjunction with Blu-ray
Disc/DVDs that have been assigned an age rating
or numeric rating that indicates the maturity level
of the content. These numbers help you control
the types of Blu-ray Disc/DVDs that your family
can watch.
Select an age rating you want to set for the BD
Parental Rating and a rating level you want to set
for the DVD Parental Rating. The player will only
play Blu-ray Discs rated at or below the age rating
and DVDs rated below the numeric rating unless
the password is entered.
Larger numbers indicate more mature content.
DivX®
i X® Vid
Video O
On D
Demand
d
BD Parental Rating
View DivX® VOD Registration Codes to purchase
and play DivX® VOD contents.
Prevent playback of Blu-ray Discs with specific
age ratings unless a password is entered.
Reset
DVD Parental Rating
All settings will revert to the default except for the
network and Smart Hub settings.
Prevent playback of DVDs with specific numerical
ratings unless a password is entered.
Language
You can select the language you prefer for the
Home menu, disc menu, etc.
• On-Screen Menu : Select the language for the
on-screen displays.
• Disc Menu : Select the language for the disc
menu displays.
• Audio : Select the language for disc audio.
• Subtitle : Select the language for disc subtitles.
✎
NOTE
▪ The selected language will only appear if it is
supported on the disc.
36
English
Change Password
Change the 4-digit password used to access
security functions.
If you forgot your password
1. Remove the disc.
) button on the
2. Press and hold the STOP (
front panel for 5 seconds or more.
All settings will revert to the factory settings.
✎
NOTE
▪ When the factory default settings are restored, all
the user stored BD data will be deleted.
Change the brightness of the front panel.
• Auto : Dim during playback.
• Dim : Dim the display window.
• Bright : Brighten the display window.
Network Remote Control
The Network Remote Control function lets you
control your Blu-ray Disc player from a remote
device such as a smart phone through a wireless
connection to your local area network.
To use the Network Remote Control function,
follow these steps:
Setup
Front Display
Support
05
General
Software Upgrade
The Software Upgrade menu allows you to
upgrade the player’s software for performance
improvements or additional services. You can
upgrade in four ways:
• By Internet
• By USB
• By Disc
• By Downloaded (File)
The four methods are explained below.
By Internet
To upgrade by Internet, follow these steps:
1. Select On in the Network Remote Control
menu.
1. Select By Internet, and then press the
ENTER button. The Connecting to Server
message appears.
2. Install the Samsung network remote control
application to control your player on your
compatible portable device.
2. If there is a download available, the Download
pop-up appears with a progress bar and the
download starts.
3. Make sure your portable device and your
player are connected to the same wireless
router.
3. When the download is complete, the Upgrade
Query window appears with three choices:
Upgrade Now, Upgrade Later, or Don’t
Upgrade.
4. Start the application on your portable device.
The application should find your player and
display it on a list.
5. Select the player.
6. If this is the first time you are using the
function, it will ask you to allow or deny
remote control of the player. Select Allow.
7. Follow the instructions that came with the
application to control the player.
4. If you select Upgrade Now, the player
upgrades the software, turns off, and then
turns on automatically.
5. If you do not make a selection in one minute
or select Upgrade Later, the player stores
the new upgrade software. You can upgrade
the software later using the By Downloaded
function.
6. If you select Don’t Upgrade, the player
cancels the upgrade.
✎
NOTE
▪ Your player must be connected to the Internet to use
the By Internet function.
▪ The upgrade is complete when the player turns off,
and then turns on again by itself.
▪ Never turn the player off or back on manually during
the update process.
English
37
Setup
▪ Samsung Electronics shall take no legal responsibility
for player malfunction caused by an unstable
Internet connection or consumer negligence during a
software upgrade.
▪ If you want to cancel the upgrade while the upgrade
software is downloading, press the ENTER button.
By USB
5. Finalize the disc before you remove it from
your computer.
6. Insert the disc into player.
7. In the player’s menu, go to Settings > Support
> Software upgrade.
8. Select By Disc.
✎
To upgrade by USB, follow these steps:
NOTE
1. Visit www.samsung.com/bluraysupport
▪ When the system upgrade is done, check the
software details in the software Upgrade menu.
2. Download the latest USB software upgrade
zip archive to your computer.
▪ Do not turn off the player during the Software
Upgrade. It may cause the player to malfunction.
3. Unzip the zip archive to your computer. You
should have a single folder with the same
name as the zip file.
4. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive.
5. Make sure the disc tray is empty, and then
insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of
the player.
6. In the player’s menu, go to Settings > Support
> Software Upgrade.
7. Select By USB.
✎
NOTE
▪ The disc tray must be empty when you upgrade the
software using the USB Host jack.
▪ When the software upgrade is done, check the
software details in the software Upgrade menu.
▪ Do not turn off the player during the software
upgrade. It may cause the player to malfunction.
▪ Software upgrades using the USB Host jack must be
performed with a USB memory flash stick only.
By Disc
To upgrade by Disc, follow these steps:
By Downloaded
The By Downloaded option lets you upgrade
using a file the player downloaded earlier but
you decided not to install immediately or a file
downloaded by the player in Standby Mode (See
Download in Standby Mode below).
To upgrade By Downloaded, follow these steps:
1. If upgrade software has been downloaded,
you will see the software version number to
the right of By Downloaded.
2. Select By Downloaded, and then press the
ENTER button.
3. The player displays a message asking if you
want to upgrade. Select Yes. The player
begins the upgrade.
4. When the update is complete, the player turns
off automatically, and then turns on.
✎
NOTE
▪ When the system upgrade is done, check the
software details in the software Upgrade menu.
▪ Do not turn off the player during the software
Upgrade. It may cause the player to malfunction.
1. Visit www.samsung.com/bluraysupport.
2. Download the latest disc software upgrade
zip archive to your computer.
3. Unzip the zip archive to your computer. You
should have a single folder with the same
name as the zip file.
4. Write the folder onto a disc. We recommend a
CD-R or DVD-R.
38
English
Download in Standby Mode
You can set the Download in Standby Mode
function so that the player downloads new
upgrade software when it is in Standby mode. In
Standby mode, the player is off, but its Internet
connection is active. This allows the player to
download upgrade software automatically, when
you are not using it.
05
To set Download in Standby Mode, follow these
steps:
Setup
1. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Download in
Standby Mode, and then press the ENTER
button.
2. Select On or Off.
• Off : If you select Off, the player will notify
you with a pop up message when new
upgrade software is available.
• On : If you select On, the player will
automatically download new upgrade
software when it is in Standby mode with
the power off. If it downloads new upgrade
software, the player will ask you if you want
to install it when you turn the player on.
✎
NOTE
▪ To use the Downloaded in Standby Mode function,
your player must be connected to the Internet.
Contact Samsung
Provides contact information for assistance with
your player.
English
39
Basic Functions
Playing a Video
Disc Structure
The content of discs are usually divided as shown
below.
Playback
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE (
open the disc tray.
) button to
2. Place a disc gently into the tray with the disc’s
label facing up.
• Blu-ray Disc, DVD-VIDEO
title 1
chapter 1 chapter 2
chapter 1
title 2
chapter 2
chapter 3
track 4
track 5
• Audio CD (CD-DA)
track 1
3. Press the OPEN/CLOSE (
close the disc tray.
4. Press the PLAY (
) button to
) button.
Playback related buttons
PLAY (
STOP (
)
Starts playback.
)
Stops playback.
• If you press the button once : The
stop position is memorized.
• If you press the button twice : The
stop position is not memorized.
PAUSE (
✎
)
Pauses playback.
track 2
track 3
• MP3, WMA, DivX, MKV and MP4
folder (group) 1
file 1
file 2
file 1
folder (group) 2
file 2
file 3
Using the Disc Menu/Title Menu/
Popup Menu
Using the Disc Menu
hZ
NOTE
) button
▪ For some discs, pressing the STOP (
once may not memorize the stop position.
1. During playback, press the DISC
MENU button on the remote control.
▪ Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more
strain the player’s capabilities and may stop playing
during playback.
2. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to make a
selection, and then press the ENTER
button.
✎
NOTE
▪ Depending on the disc, the menu items may differ
and this menu may not be available.
40
English
1. During playback, press the TITLE
MENU button on the remote control.
Searching for a Desired Scene
2. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to make
the desired selection, then press the
ENTER button.
✎
During play, you can search quickly through a
chapter or track, and use the skip function to
jump to the next selection.
hzZyx
NOTE
▪ Depending on the disc, the menu items may differ
and this menu may not be available.
• During playback, press the SEARCH (
)
button.
Each time you press the SEARCH (
)
button, the playback speed will change as follows:
BD-ROM,
BD-RE/-R,
DVD-RW/-R,
DVD+RW/+R,
DVD-VIDEO
Playing the Title List
z
1. During playback, press the DISC
MENU or TITLE MENU button.
)1)2)3
)4)5)6)7
(1(2(3
(4(5(6(7
DivX, MKV, MP4
)1)2)3
(1(2(3
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select an
entry you want to play from the Title
List, and then press the ENTER
button.
• To return to normal speed playback, press the
PLAY (
) button.
✎
✎
NOTE
▪ If your disc has a playlist, press the GREEN (B) button
to go to the playlist.
▪ The player does not play sound in search mode.
Skipping Chapters
Using the Popup Menu
h
1. During playback, press the POPUP
MENU button on the remote control.
2. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons or ENTER
button to select the desired menu.
✎
NOTE
NOTE
▪ Depending on the disc, the menu items may differ
and this menu may not be available.
hzZyx
• During playback, press the SKIP (
)
button.
If you press the SKIP (
) button, the disc
moves to the next chapter.
If you press the SKIP (
) button, the disc
moves to the beginning of the chapter. One
more press makes the disc move to the
beginning of the previous chapter.
English
41
Basic Functions
Z
06
Using the Search and Skip Functions
Using the Title Menu
Basic Functions
Slow Motion Play/Step Motion Play
✎
NOTE
▪ Depending on the disc, the Tools menu may differ.
Slow Motion Play
hzZyx
• In pause mode, press the SEARCH (
)
button.
Each time you press the SEARCH (
) button,
the playback speed will change as follows:
* 1/8 * 1/4 * 1/2
• To return to normal speed playback, press the
) button.
PLAY (
✎
NOTE
▪ The player does not play sound in Slow mode.
hzZyx
• In pause mode, press the PAUSE (
) button.
) button, a
Each time you press the PAUSE (
new frame appears.
• To return to normal speed playback, press the
PLAY (
) button.
NOTE
▪ The player does not play sound in slow mode.
Using the TOOLS button
During playback, you can operate the disc
menu by pressing the TOOLS button.
• Tools Menu Screen
Tools
Title Search
1/2
Chapter Search
:
Time Search
: 00:00:13/01:34:37
Repeat Mode
:
0ff
Full Screen
:
Original
1/20
Picture Settings
:
Normal
Audio
:
1/1 JPN 2CH
Subtitle
:
0/2 Off
Angle
:
1/1
%
< Change
42
English
hzZy
1. During playback, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Title Search,
Chapter Search, or Time Search.
3. Press the ◄► or number button to select
desired Title, Chapter or Time, then press the
ENTER button.
Repeating the Title or Chapter
hzZy
Step Motion Play
✎
Moving to a Desired Scene Directly
" Enter ' Return
To repeat the disc title or chapter.
Depending on the disc, the Repeat function may
not be available.
1. During playback, press the TOOLS
button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select
Repeat Mode.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select Chapter or
Title, then press the ENTER button.
4. To return to normal play, press the TOOLS
button again.
5. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Repeat Mode.
6. Press the ◄► buttons to select Off, then
press the ENTER button.
Selecting the Picture Settings
1. During playback, press the TOOLS
button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select
Repeat Mode.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select Repeat A-B,
then press the ENTER button.
4. Press the ENTER button at the point where
you want repeat play to start (A).
5. Press the ENTER button at the point where
you want repeat play to stop (B).
hzZy
This function enables you to adjust video quality
when the player is connected to a TV.
1. During playback, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Picture
Settings, and then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
Picture Settings.
• Dynamic : Choose this setting to increase
Sharpness.
• Normal : Choose this setting for most
viewing applications.
6. To return to normal play, press the TOOLS
button again.
• Movie : This is the best setting for watching
movies.
7. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Repeat Mode.
8. Press the ◄► buttons to select Off, and then
press the ENTER button.
✎
NOTE
✎
▪ If you set point (B) before 5 seconds has lapsed, a
prohibition message appears.
▪ Depending on the disc, the menu items may differ
and this menu may not be available.
• User : Lets you adjust the sharpness and
noise reduction function respectively.
NOTE
▪ When you use BD wise function, this menu will not
appear.
Selecting the Audio Language
hzZx
Changing to Full Screen
1. During playback, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Full Screen.
You can also operate this function by
pressing the AUDIO button on the
remote control.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
mode.
1. During playback, press the TOOLS button.
✎
NOTE
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Audio.
▪ This function is available when the TV aspect ratio is
16:9 full. (See page 26)
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
audio language.
✎
NOTE
▪ The ◄► indicator will not appear on the screen
if the BONUSVIEW section does not contain any
BONUSVIEW audio settings.
▪ Information about the main feature/BONUSVIEW
mode will also appear if the Blu-ray Disc has a
BONUSVIEW section.
Press the ◄► button to switch between main
feature and BONUSVIEW audio modes.
English
43
Basic Functions
hzZy
06
Repeating a Section
Basic Functions
▪ This function depends on the selection of audio
languages encoded on the disc and may not be
available.
▪ A Blu-ray Disc can contain up to 32 audio languages
and a DVD up to 8.
▪ Some Blu-ray Discs may allow you to select either
the multi-channel LPCM or Dolby digital audio
soundtrack in English.
▪ If you press the AUDIO button on the remote control,
the Audio bar appears.
Press the RETURN button to remove the Audio bar.
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Changing the Camera Angle
hZ
When a Blu-ray Disc/DVD contains multiple angles
of a particular scene, you can use the ANGLE
function.
1. During playback, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Angle.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
Angle.
Setting BONUSVIEW
hZx
You can also operate this function by
pressing the SUBTITLE button on the
remote control.
h
The BONUSVIEW feature allows you to view
additional content (such as commentaries) in a
small screen window while the movie is playing.
This function is only available if the disc has the
Bonusview feature.
1. During playback, press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Subtitle.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
subtitle language.
✎
1. During playback, press the TOOLS
button.
NOTE
Tools
▪ Depending on the Blu-ray Disc / DVD, you may be
able to change the desired subtitle in the Disc Menu.
Press the DISC MENU button.
▪ This function depends on the selection of subtitles
that are encoded on the disc and may not be
available on all Blu-ray Discs/DVDs.
Time Search
: 00:00:13/01:34:37
Repeat Mode
:
0ff
Full Screen
:
Original
Picture Settings
:
Normal
Audio
:
1/1 JPN 2CH
Subtitle
:
0/2 Off
Angle
:
1/1
BONUSVIEW Video
▪ A Blu-ray Disc can contain up to 255 subtitle
languages and a DVD up to 32.
BONUSVIEW Audio :
Off
0/1 Off
' Return
▪ Information about the main feature/BONUSVIEW
mode will also appear if the Blu-ray Disc has a
BONUSVIEW section.
ttons to select BONUSVIEW
2. Press the ▲▼ but
buttons
Video or BONUSVIEW Audio.
▪ This function changes both the primary and
secondary subtitles at the same time.
3. Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
Bonusview.
▪ The total numbers of primary and secondary
subtitles are displayed respectively.
▪ If you press the SUBTITLE button on the remote
control, the subtitle bar appears.
Press the RETURN button to remove the subtitle bar.
44
English
✎
NOTE
▪ If you switch from BONUSVIEW Video, BONUSVIEW
Audio will change automatically in accordance with
BONUSVIEW Video.
0
NUMBER buttons : During the Playlist playback,
press the desired track number. The selected track
is played.
ow
Buttons on the Remote Control
used for Music Playback
1
0
Playing an Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3
9
2
3
4
5
8
1. Insert an Audio CD (CD-DA) or an MP3 Disc
into the disc tray.
• For an Audio CD (CD-DA), the first track
plays automatically.
• For an MP3 disc, press the ▲▼ buttons
to select Music, then press the ENTER
button.
6
7
Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3 Screen Elements
1
1
YELLOW (C) button : Displays check box in the
music list.
2
SKIP button : During playback, moves to the next
page in the Music List or moves to the next track in
the Playlist.
2
3
Music
1/13
TRACK 001
TRACK 001
00:43
TRACK 002
03:56
3
PAUSE button : Pauses playback.
4
SEARCH buttons : Fast Play.
(Audio CD (CD-DA) only)
5
PLAY button : Plays the currently selected track.
6
▲▼ buttons : Select a track in the Music List or
Playlist.
7
ENTER button : Plays the selected track.
1
Displays the music information.
8
STOP button : Stops a track.
2
Displays the playlist.
3
Display the current track/total tracks.
4
Displays buttons available.
TRACK 003
7
6
04:41
TRACK 004
+
04:02
00:13 / 00:43
" Enter < Page / Tools ' Return
Audio CD
5
4
English
45
Basic Functions
9
SKIP button : During playback, moves to the
previous page in the Music List or moves to the
previous track in the Playlist.
If you press this button after three seconds of
playback in the Playlist, the current track is replayed
from the beginning. But, if you press this button
less than three seconds after playback starts in the
Playlist, the previous track is played.
06
Listening to Music
Basic Functions
5
Shows the current play time/total play time.
6
Displays the current playback status.
7
Displays the repeated playback status.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select the track
you want to play, and then press the ENTER
button.
3. Press the YELLOW (C) button.
4. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to a
desired track, and then press the ENTER
button. A check appears on the track.
Repeat this procedure to select additional
tracks.
Audio CD | Music
1/2 Page
Selected Items : 3
Repeat an Audio CD (CD-DA)/MP3
1. During the Playlist playback, press the
TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select
Repeat Mode, and then press the ◄►
buttons to select the desired repeat mode.
3. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Shuffle Mode,
and then press the ◄► buttons to select On
or Off.
4. Press the ENTER button.
TRACK 001
TRACK 002
00:43
03:56
TRACK 003
TRACK 004
04:41
04:02
TRACK 005
TRACK 006
03:43
03:40
TRACK 007
TRACK 008
04:06
03:52
Close Edit Mode ( ) Page / Tools " Select ' Return
5.. To remove a track from the list, move to the
track, and then press the ENTER button
again.
The check on the track is cancelled.
6. When done, press the TOOLS button.
Off
Songs are played in the order in which
they were recorded.
(
) One Song
The current song is repeated.
(
) All
All songs are repeated.
) Shuffle
The random option plays songs in
random order. To operate this function,
please set the shuffle mode to On.
7. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Play
Selected, and then press the ENTER button.
The tracks yyou selected p
playy automatically.
y
Music
1/3
(
TRACK 001
TRACK 001
00:43
TRACK 002
03:56
TRACK 003
04:41
+
Playlist
00:13 / 00:43
Audio CD
1. Insert an Audio CD (CD-DA) or an MP3 Disc
into the disc tray.
• For an Audio CD (CD-DA), the first track
plays automatically.
• For an MP3 disc, press the ▲▼ buttons
to select Music, then press the ENTER
button.
2. To move to the Music List, press the STOP
) or RETURN button.
(
The Music List screen appears.
46
English
" Enter / Tools ' Return
8.. To go to the Music List, press the RETURN
button.
✎
NOTE
▪ You can create a playlist with up to 99 tracks on
Audio CDs (CD-DA).
Playing a JPEG files
1. Insert a JPEG disc into the disc tray.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Photos, and
then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to select the folder
you want to play, and then press the ENTER
button.
4. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to select the photo
you want to play, and then press the ENTER
button.
✎
NOTE
▪ You can’t enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the
full screen mode.
✎
NOTE
▪ To enable the background music function, the photo
file must be in the same storage media as the music
file. However, the sound quality can be affected by
the bit rate of the MP3 file, the size of the photo, and
the encoding method.
Using the Slide Show function
1. Press the TOOLS button.
2. Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Start Slide
Show, and then press the ENTER button.
The Slide Show starts.
3. To pause the slide show, press the TOOLS
g
button again.
Using the TOOLS button
Tools
Pause Slide Show
You can use various function by pressing
the TOOLS button.
Slide Show Speed :
Slide Show Effect
Normal
:
Blind
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Zoom
Rotate
Information
Tools
" Enter ' Return
Start Slide Show
Background Music :
Off
Background Music Setting
Zoom
4. Press the ▲▼ buttons
uttons to select Pause Slide
Show, and then press the ENTER button.
Rotate
Information
" Enter ' Return
5. You can also set the slide show speed and
effect using the same method.
• Start Slide Show : Select to start the slide
show.
• Background Music : Select to listen to music
while viewing a picture.
• Background Music Setting : Select to set the
background music setting.
• Zoom : Select to enlarge the current picture.
(Enlarged up to 4 times)
English
47
Basic Functions
G
• Rotate : Select to rotate the picture. (This will
rotate the picture either clockwise or counter
clockwise.)
• Information : Shows the picture information
including the name and size, etc.
06
Playing back Pictures
Basic Functions
Playing back a USB Storage Device
You can use the USB connection to play multimedia
files (MP3, JPEG, DivX, etc) located from a USB
storage device.
1. Move to the Home menu.
My Contents
Photos
Music
Internet
Settings
d WPS(PBC)
2. In Stop mode
mode, connect the USB storage
device to the USB port on the front panel of
the player.
My Contents
Videos
Connected
PhotosDevice
123
Music
My Devices
Internet
Settings
" Enter ' Return
Safely Remove USB d WPS(PBC)
3. Press the ENTER button.
button
4. Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to select the
desired Videos, Music, or Photos, and then
press the ENTER button.
5. For playing back Video, Music or Photo files,
see pages 40~47.
48
English
NOTE
▪ You must remove the USB storage device safely
(by performing the “Safely Remove USB” function)
in order to prevent a possible damage to the USB
memory. Press the MENU button to move to the
Home menu, select the YELLOW (C) button, and
then press the ENTER button.
▪ If you insert a disc when playing a USB storage
device, the device mode changes to “DVD or CD”
automatically.
Videos
My Devices
✎
Network Services
111 Connect the player to the network.
(See pages 22~23)
222 Configure the network settings.
(See pages 31~35)
Using Smart Hub
Using Smart Hub, you can stream movies, videos,
and music from the Internet, access various for
pay or free-of-charge applications and view them
on your TV. Application content includes news,
sports, weather forecasts, stock market quotes,
maps, photos, and games.
You can also start this function by
pressing the SMART HUB button on
the remote control.
Starting Smart Hub for the First
Time
To start Smart Hub for the first time, follow these
steps :
111 Go to the Home menu.
My Contents
444 If the Country screen has appeared, press the
▲▼ buttons to select your country, then press
the ENTER button.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Certain applications are available only in certain
countries.
555 The Terms of Service Agreement screen
appears. If you want to agree, press the ◄► buttons
to select Agree, then press the ENTER
button.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Screens can take a few seconds to appear.
666 The Service Update screen appears and
installs a number of services and applications.
When done, it closes. The applications and
services downloaded are displayed on the
Smart Hub screen. This may take some time.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Smart Hub may close momentarily during the
installation process.
▪▪ A number of screens may appear after installation.
You can press the ENTER button to close them or let
them close on their own.
777 To start an application, press the ▲▼◄►
buttons to highlight a widget, then press the
ENTER button.
Videos
Photos
Music
My Devices
Internet
Settings
d WPS(PBC)
222 Press the ◄► buttons to select Internet, and
then press the ENTER button.
English
49
Network Services
Read the following instructions before using any
network service.
333 The Smart Hub screen appears.
In a few cases, the Country screen appears
immediately after.
07
You can enjoy various network services such as
Smart Hub or BD-LIVE by connecting the player
to your network.
Network Services
Smart Hub at a Glance
1
3
2
4
5
6
Search
Your Video
Samsung Apps
Contents 1
Contents 2
Contents 3
Contents 4
Recommended
Contents 1
xxxxxxxx
Contents 2
xxxxxxxx
Contents 1
Contents 2
Contents 3
Contents 4
Contents 5
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
7
Contents 3
Contents 4
Contents 5
Contents 6
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Contents 7
Contents 8
Contents 9
Contents 10
Contents 11
Contents 12
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
a Login b Sort by c Edit Mode d Settings
7
1
2
3
4
5
50
6
Commercial : Displays the Smart Hub Guide, an
introduction to the player, and new application
introductions.
Your Video : Provides recommendations for videos
based on your tastes.
•• Lets you see movie recommendations based on
your previous preferences.
•• Lets you select a movie, displays a list of VOD
(Video on Demand) providers that have the movie,
and then lets you choose a provider for streaming.
(Streaming is unavailable in some areas.)
•• For instructions to use Your Video, please visit
www.samsung.com.
Search : Provides an integrated search of your video
providers and connected AllShare devices.
•• Usable while using Smart Hub (except when you
are watching a Blu-ray Disc).
•• For easy access, use the SEARCH button on the
remote control.
•• For instructions to use search function, please
visit www.samsung.com.
Samsung Apps : You can download various for pay
or free-of-charge application services.
Recommended : Displays recommended contents
managed by Samsung.
English
Navigation Help : Displays the remote control
buttons you can use to navigate in Smart Hub.
•• RED (A) : To log in to Smart Hub.
•• GREEN (B) : To sort the applications.
•• YELLOW (C) : To edit the applications.
•• BLUE (D) : To change the settings of Smart Hub.
My Applications : Displays your personal gallery
of applications which you can add to, modify, and
delete.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for
any interruption of the Smart Hub service caused by
the service provider for any reason.
▪▪ The Smart Hub service downloads and processes
data via the Internet so that you can enjoy the
Internet contents on your TV screen.
If the Internet connection is unstable, the service
may be delayed or interrupted.
Furthermore, the player may turn off automatically in
response to conditions on the Internet.
If this occurs, check the Internet connection and try
again.
▪▪ Application services may be provided in English only
and the contents available may vary, depending on
your area.
▪▪ For more information about a Smart Hub service,
visit the web site of the applicable service provider.
▪▪ The services provided are subject to change by the
Smart Hub service provider without notice.
▪▪ The Smart Hub service contents may differ
depending on the player’s firmware version.
1
2
1
def
ghi
jkl
mno
pqrs
tuv
wxyz
4
5
7
2
3
T9
9
0
ab
To establish your own, exclusive, configuration of
Smart Hub, create your own Smart TV Account.
To create an account, follow these steps:
6
8
Shift
Creating an Account
3
abc
.,–
Delete
Ab
AB
1
6

111 Press the RED (A) button on your remote
control. The Create Account screen appears.
Search
b Input Method / Language: English
4
1
The current keypad.
Use to enter letters, numbers, and symbols.
Press the SUBTITLE button on the remote control to
shift the input mode.
: ab, Ab, AB, numbers or icons.
3
Displays the current input mode.
5
6
Smart TV ID
5
2
4
Your Video
Press the GREEN (B) button on the remote control
to change the input method. (T9 or ABC)
Press the TOOLS button on the remote control to
change the language.
Press the AUDIO button on the remote control to
delete a character.
Entering Text, Numbers and Symbols
To enter text, press the number button on the
remote that corresponds to the letter you want
to enter. Press the button rapidly to enter a letter
that is not the first letter listed on the On-Screen
keypad button. For example, if you want to enter
the letter b, press the 2 button on your remote
rapidly twice. To enter the first letter listed on a
button, press, release, and then wait.
Password
Samsung Apps
Recommended
Contents 1
xxxxxxxx
Contents 1
Login
Press [Enter]
Contents 2
Contents 3
Press
[Enter] xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Contents 2
Contents 2
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Contents 7
Contents 8
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Contents 3
Login
xxxxxxxx
Create Account
Contents 9
xxxxxxxx
Contents 4
%
Contents 4
Contents 5
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Remember my Smart TV ID and password
Contents 1
Contents 3
Contents 4
Contents 5
Contents 6
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
Cancel
Forgot Password
Contents 10
Contents 11
Contents 12
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
a Login b Sort by c Edit Mode d Settings
222 Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to select Create
Account, and then press the ENTER button.
333 On the next screen, select Smart TV ID, and
then press the ENTER button.
An entry screen and keypad appear.
444 Use the keypad to enter your e-mail address.
This will serve as your ID.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ The keypad works like the keypad on a cell phone.
555 When done, press the ENTER button to
select OK, and then press the ENTER button
again. The Create Account screen re-appears.
666 Select Password, and then press the ENTER
button. An entry screen and a keypad appear.
777 Use the keypad to enter a password.
The password can be any combination of
letters, numbers, and symbols.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Press the RED (A) button on your remote to show or
hide the password as you enter it.
English
51
Network Services
Through your remote, you can use the On-Screen
Keypad to enter letters, numbers, and symbols.
To move within the text, use the Arrow buttons.
To delete text, move the cursor to the right of the
character you want to delete, and then press the
AUDIO button. To change case or enter numbers
or punctuation, press the SUBTITLE button.
07
Using the Keypad
Network Services
888 When done, press the ENTER button to
select OK, and then press the ENTER button
again. The Create Account screen re-appears.
999 Select Confirm password, and then press
the ENTER button.
1111 Repeat Steps 7 and 8.
1111 When the Create Account screen re-appears,
select Create Account, and then press the
ENTER button. The Confirmation window
appears.
1111 Select OK, and then press the ENTER button.
The Continue to Register Service window
appears.
1111 Select Go Register, and then press the
ENTER button.
1111 The Register Service Account Window
appears.
•• If you have existing accounts with any of
the listed providers, you can associate the
provider account and the provider account
password with your Smart TV Account.
Registration makes it easier to access
the providers web site. For registration
instructions, go to Step 2 in Account
Management under the Settings Menu.
•• If you don’t have existing provider accounts
or do not want to register existing accounts
at this time, select OK, and then press
the ENTER button. You can also let the
window close on its own in about a minute.
NOTE
✎✎
▪▪ You must use an e-mail address as an ID.
▪▪ You can register up to 10 User Accounts.
▪▪ You do not need an account to use Smart Hub.
Account Log In
To log in to your Smart TV Account, follow these
steps:
111 With the Smart Hub main screen displayed
on your TV, press the RED (A) button on your
remote. The Create Account screen appears.
222 Select the Down Arrow next to the Smart TV
ID field, and then press the ENTER button.
52
English
333 Select your ID from the list that appears, and
then press the ENTER button. The Create
Account screen re-appears.
444 Select Password, and then press the ENTER
button. An entry window and a keypad
appears.
555 Using the keypad and your remote, enter your
password. When done, press the ENTER
button, select OK, and then press the ENTER
button again.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ If you want Smart Hub to enter your password
automatically, select Remember my Smart TV ID and
password after you have entered your password,
and then press the ENTER button. A check
appears. Smart Hub will now enter your password
automatically when you select or enter your ID.
The Settings Menu - BLUE (D)
The Settings Menu Screen gives you access
to account management, reset, and properties
functions.
To access the Settings Menu, and then select a
menu item, follow these steps:
111 Press the BLUE (D) button on your remote.
222 Press the ▲▼ to select a menu item, and
then press the ENTER button.
The functions on the Settings Menu screen are
described below.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ The Service Manager item listed in the Settings
Menu is not available for Blu-ray Disc players.
Account Management
The Account Management Menu contains
functions that let you register your service provider
accounts, change your Smart Hub password, and
delete or deactivate your Smart TV Account.
111 In the Account Management menu, select
Register Service Account, and then press the
ENTER button. The Register Service Account
Window appears.
222 Press the ▲▼ arrow buttons to select a
Service Provider you want to associate with
your Smart TV Account, and then press the
ENTER button.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ If you have a Samsung apps account and you want
to use the Samsung Apps function in Smart Hub, you
must register your Samsung Apps account here. See
page 56~58 for more information.
333 Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Register, and
then using your remote and the on-screen
Keypad, enter your site ID and password.
When done, press the ENTER button.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ This is the ID and password you normally use to
access your account on this site.
444 If you have entered the ID and password
correctly, the Registered Successfully
message appears.
555 If you pressed OK, repeat Steps 2 through 4
to associate another Service Provider.
666 When you are done, press the RETURN
button.
Change Password
The Change Password function lets you change
your Smart Hub password. To change the
password, follow these steps:
111 Select Change Password, and then press
the ENTER button.
222 Enter your current password. The next screen
appears.
333 On the next screen, enter a new password on
the first line. Enter it again on the second line
to confirm.
444 The Changing Password Complete message
screen appears. Press the ENTER button
or wait for the screen to close - about 5
seconds.
Remove Service Accounts
The Remove Service Accounts function cancels
all your current registered Service Accounts that
you registered on the Register Service Account
screen.
Deactivate Account
The Deactivate Account function deactivates your
Smart TV Account and deletes it and all your
account settings entirely from Smart Hub.
Reset
The Reset function initializes all downloaded
widgets, erases all user accounts and settings
from the player, and resets all Smart Hub settings
to the factory default settings. It then restarts
Smart Hub as if it were starting for the first time.
Your account, however, remains on the Smart Hub
server. To log into your account, enter your ID and
password on the Create Account screen.
To use the Reset function, follow these steps:
111 In the Settings menu, select Reset, and then
press the ENTER button.
The Reset screen appears.
222 Enter the your Security password. This is the
password you entered if you set up a BD or
DVD Parental rating (See page 36). If you did
not, enter 0000.
English
53
Network Services
If you have existing accounts with any of the
providers listed by the Register Service Account
function, you can associate the provider account
and the provider account password with your
Smart TV Account. If you associate the account,
you will be able to log onto the account through
Smart Hub easily, without entering your account
name or password.
To use the Register Service Account function,
follow these steps:
07
Register Service Account
Network Services
333 After a few moments, Smart Hub automatically
resets. The screen may go black, then Smart
Hub re-appears. In a few moments, it starts
the re-initialization procedure.
444 To complete the re-initialization, go to Step 4
in Starting Smart Hub for the First Time. (See
page 49)
✎ NOTE
)
▪▪ If you forgot your password, press the STOP (
button on the front panel of the player for more than
5 seconds with no disc inserted.
Properties
The Properties menu item lists three functions that
display information about Smart Hub :
Detail
Lists information about Smart Hub including
version number, the number of services installed,
memory usage, and the unique product ID.
Check the speed of your internet connection
Runs a test which shows how fast your Internet
connection to the Samsung’s server is in Mbps
(Megabits per second).
Speeds lower than 1.5 Mbps can limit your
enjoyment of Smart Hub.
Terms of Service Agreement
Displays the Terms of Service Agreement.
The Edit Mode Menu - YELLOW (C)
The functions in the Edit Mode menu let you
manipulate the widgets in the My Applications
section of the Smart Hub screen. Using these
functions, you can lock and unlock access to
some widgets, New Folders and move widgets to
them, rename folders, delete widgets, and change
the position of widgets on the screen.
To access the Edit Mode Menu, and then select a
menu item, follow these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote. The Edit Mode menu bar appears on
the bottom of the screen.
54
English
222 Press the ▲▼◄► to select a menu item, and
then press the ENTER button.
The functions in the Edit Mode Menu bar are
described below.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Some menu items may not appear on the screen.
To see these items, press the ◄► to move to the
screen edge, and then press one more time to reveal
the items.
▪▪ You can close the bar by highlighting the X on the
bottom right side, and then pressing the ENTER
button.
Move
The Move function lets you change the screen
position of a widget. To use the Move function,
follow these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Select a widget, and then press the ENTER
button. A check appears above the widget.
333 Press the ▲▼◄► to select Move, and then
press the ENTER button. A position change
icon appears above the widget.
444 Press the ▲▼◄► to move the icon. Press
the ENTER button when the icon is in the
position of your choice. The widget moves to
its new location.
Move to Folder
The Move to Folder function lets you move a
widget to a folder. To use the Move to Folder
function, follow these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Select a widget, and then press the ENTER
button. If you already create a folder, the
widget can be moved.
333 Press the ▲▼◄► to select Move to Folder,
and then press the ENTER button. The Move
to Folder window opens.
444 Press the ▲▼◄► to select a folder, and
then press the ENTER button. The Moved to
Folder message appears, and then closes.
The widget has been moved to the folder.
222 In My Applications, press the ▲▼◄► to
select a folder, and then press the ENTER
button. The folder opens.
333 Select a widget, and then press the ENTER
button. The widget’s application or service
starts.
To Edit Items in a Folder
Select a folder, and then press the ENTER button.
The folder opens.
Press the YELLOW (C) button on your remote.
The Edit buttons appear at the bottom of the
screen.
These buttons work the same as the Edit Mode
menu buttons on the main screen. For example,
to move a widget back to the My Applications
main screen:
111 Select the widget.
222 Select Move to Folder, and then press the
ENTER button. The Move to Folder window
appears.
333 Select My Applications, and then press the
ENTER button. The Move to Folder window
closes and the widget returns to the main My
Applications screen.
New Folder
The New Folder function lets you create and name
new folders. Once you have created a folder, you
can move widgets into it. To use the New Folder
function, follow these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Press the ▲▼◄► to move the cursor to New
Folder, and then press the ENTER button.
The New Folder window and a keypad
appear.
Rename Folder
The Rename Folder function lets you rename
folders. To use the Rename Folder function, follow
these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Press the ▲▼◄► to select a folder, and then
press the ENTER button.
333 Press the ▲▼◄► to select Rename a Folder,
and then press the ENTER button. The Folder
Rename window and a keypad appears.
444 Use the keypad to enter a new name, and
then press the ENTER button. The Rename
window closes and the new name appears
below the folder.
Lock
The Lock function lets you lock some widgets
in My Applications so they can not be opened
without entering the Parental Security Code.
To use the Lock function, follow these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Press the ▲▼◄► to select a widget, and
then press the ENTER button. If the widget
can be locked, the Lock menu item is
enabled.
333 Press the ▲▼◄► to select Lock, and then
press the ENTER button. The Lock Service
window appears.
444 Enter your Parental Security Code (See
page 36). If you have not created a Parental
Security Code, enter 0000.
555 Press the ENTER button. The Lock Service
window appears confirming the lock, and
then closes. A lock symbol appears next to
the widget.
333 Use the keypad to enter the name of the
folder, and then press the ENTER button.
The New Folder screen closes and the New
Folder appears on the Smart Hub screen.
English
55
Network Services
111 Close the Edit Mode menu.
07
To Access Widgets in a Folder
Network Services
Unlock
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Press the ▲▼◄► to select a locked widget,
and then press the ENTER button.
333 Press the ▲▼◄► to select Unlock, and then
press the ENTER button. The Lock Service
window appears.
444 Enter the Parental Security Code (See page
36). If you have not created a Parental
Security Code, enter 0000.
555 Press the ENTER button. The Lock Service
Released window appears confirming the lock
has been release, and then closes.
Delete
The Delete function lets you delete widgets from
My Applications. To use the Delete function, follow
these steps:
111 Press the YELLOW (C) button on your
remote.
222 Press the ▲▼◄► to select a widget, and
then press the ENTER button.
333 Press the ▲▼◄► to select Delete, and then
press the ENTER button. The message, “Do
you want to delete selected item(s)?” appears.
444 Select Yes, and then press the ENTER
button. The widget is deleted.
The Sort Menu - GREEN (B)
The functions in the Sort Menu let you sort the
widgets in My Applications by Name, Date,
Frequency (of use), and Category. If you manually
change the position of a widget, the Sort Menu
automatically highlights User Defined when you
start it.
To sort the widgets in My Applications, follow
these steps:
111 Press the GREEN (B) button on your remote.
222 Press the ◄► to select a sorting method,
and then press the ENTER button. Smart
Hub sorts the widgets by the method you
have chosen.
56
English
Samsung Apps
Samsung Apps lets you download for pay or freeof-charge applications and services to your Bluray Disc player and view or use them on your TV.
These applications and services include videos,
music, photos, games, news, sports, etc. Widgets
for the new apps appear in My Applications.
Additional applications and services are added
regularly.
For Pay Apps
To download for pay apps, you need to create a
Samsung Apps account and add a credit card to the
account.
To create a Samsung Apps account, please visit
www.samsung.com.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ This service may not provided in some countries.
Accessing the Samsung Apps Screen
To access Samsung Apps, press the ▲▼◄►
buttons to navigate to the Samsung Apps area
on the Smart Hub main screen, and then press
the ENTER button. The Samsung Apps screen
appears.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ If this is the first time you are accessing this screen,
the terms of service window appears. If you want
to agree, select Agree, and then press the ENTER
button.
111 Press the ◄► buttons to move to the
category list on the left.
222 Press the ▲▼ to highlight a category. In a few
seconds, the Samsung Apps screen displays
the applications in that category. The Sort
tabs appear across the top.
333 Press the ► button to move to the displayed
applications or services.
444 Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to select an
application or service, and then press the
ENTER button. The Application Details screen
appears describing the service or application.
555 Select Download Now, and then press the
ENTER button. If the application or service is
free, it downloads and runs. If not, and there
is a fee, follow the directions on the screen to
complete the download.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ Some apps are free to download, but require
registration with the provider or a paid account with
the provider to use.
▪▪ Widgets for applications and services you have
downloaded from Samsung Apps appear in My
Applications.
Sort By Tabs
You can access the Sort By tabs on the top of
the screen using the ▲▼◄► buttons. Each
tab displays the services or applications in the
category you chose, sorted by the criteria on the
tab (Recommended, Most Downloaded, Most
Recent, Name).
You can also use the Blue (D) button on your
remote to access the Sort By tabs. Each time
you press the Blue (D) button, you change the
display from one sort tab to the next.
Samsung Apps by category
The following categories are available:
•• What’s New? : Displays newly registered
applications.
•• Video : Displays various video media such as
movies, TV shows, and short length videos.
•• Game : Displays various games such as sudoku
and chess.
•• Sports : Displays various sports media services
such as match information, images, and short
length videos.
•• Lifestyle : Includes various lifestyle media
services such as music, personal photo
management tools, and social networking such
as Facebook and Twitter.
•• Information : Includes various information
services such as news, stocks, and weather.
•• Other : Includes other miscellaneous services.
My Account
My Account gives you access to your Samsung
Apps order and download history, and to the My
Apps Cash screen. You must have a Samsung
Apps account to access this information.
Help
If you have questions about Samsung Apps,
check Help first. If none of the tips apply, please
visit the www. samsung.com.
To use the Help function, follow these steps:
111 Press the ▲▼◄► buttons to select Help,
and then press the ENTER button.
222 Press the ▲▼ to scroll the Help text.
333 Press the ◄ to exit Help.
English
57
Network Services
To use the Samsung Apps screen, follow these
steps:
07
Using the Samsung Apps Screen
Network Services
Using the colored buttons on your remote
with Samsung Apps
•• RED (A) (Login) : To log into your Smart TV
Account.
•• GREEN (B) (Thumbnail View/List View) : To
toggle applications between Thumbnail and List
view.
•• BLUE (D) (Sort By) : To sort the applications
in a category by Recommended, Most
Downloaded, Most Recent, or Name.
•• Return : To return to the previous menu.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ The Internet contents services may be added or
deleted by providers without notice.
For instruction to use Your Video or Search
Function, please visit www.samsung.com.
BD-LIVE™
Once the player is connected to the network, you
can enjoy various movie-related service contents
using a BD-LIVE compliant disc.
111 Attach a USB memory stick to the USB jack
on the side of the player, and then check
its remaining memory. The memory device
must have at least 1GB of free space to
accommodate the BD-LIVE services.
222 Insert a Blu-ray Disc that supports BD-LIVE.
333 Select an item from various BD-LIVE service
contents provided by the disc manufacturer.
✎ NOTE
▪▪ The way you use BD-LIVE and the provided contents
may differ, depending on the disc manufacturer.
58
English
Using the AllShare Function
AllShare lets you play music, video, and photo
files located in your PC or your DLNA compatible
mobile phone or NAS on the player.
To use AllShare with your player, you must
connect the player to your network (See pages
22~23).
To use AllShare with your PC, you must install
AllShare software on your PC.
If you have a DLNA compatible mobile phone or
NAS, you can use AllShare without any additional
software.
You can download the PC software and get
detailed instructions for using AllShare from the
Samsung.com web site.
Appendix
08
Troubleshooting
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
No operation can be performed with the
remote control.
•• Check the batteries in the remote control. They may need replacing.
•• Operate the remote control at a distance of no more than 20 feet.
•• Remove batteries and hold down one or more buttons for several minutes
to drain the microprocessor inside the remote control to reset it. Reinstall
batteries and try to operate the remote control again.
Disc does not play.
•• Ensure that the disc is installed with the label side facing up.
•• Check the region number of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD.
Disc Menu does not appear.
•• Ensure that the disc has disc menus.
The prohibition message appears on the
screen.
•• This message appears when an invalid button is pressed.
•• The Blu-ray Disc/DVD’s software doesn’t support the feature (e.g., angles).
•• You’ve requested a title or chapter number or search time that is out of
range.
Play mode differs from the Setup Menu
selection.
•• Some of the functions selected in the Setup Menu may not work properly if
the disc is not encoded with the corresponding function.
The screen ratio cannot be changed.
•• The Screen Ratio is fixed on your Blu-ray Disc/DVD.
•• This is not a problem with the player.
No audio.
•• Make sure you have selected the correct Digital Output in the Audio Options
Menu.
The screen is blocked
•• If the HDMI output is set to a resolution your TV cannot support (for
example, 1080p), you may not see a picture on your TV.
•• Press the STOP (
) button (on front panel) for more than 5 seconds with
no disc inside. All settings will revert to the factory settings.
•• When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data is
deleted.
English
59
Appendix
Before requesting service, please check the following.
Appendix
Forgot password
PROBLEM
SOLUTION
•• Press the STOP (
) button (on front panel) for more than 5 seconds with
no disc inside. All settings including the password will revert to the factory
settings.
Don’t use this unless absolutely necessary.
•• When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data is
deleted.
If you experience other problems.
•• Go to the contents and find the section of the user manual that contains the
explanations regarding the current problem, and follow the procedure once
again.
•• If the problem still cannot be solved, please contact your nearest Samsung
authorized service center.
The picture is noisy or distorted
•• Make sure that the disc is not dirty or scratched.
•• Clean the disc.
No HDMI output.
•• Check the connection between the TV and the HDMI jack of the player.
•• Check if your TV supports 576p/480p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p HDMI input
resolution.
Abnormal HDMI output screen.
•• If random noise appears on the screen, it means that TV does not support
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
AllShare function
I can see folders shared through AllShare,
but I cannot see the files.
•• AllShares shows only files corresponding to the Image, Music, and Movie
categories. Files that do not correspond to these categories may not be
displayed.
Video is played intermittently.
•• Check if the network is stable.
•• Check if the network cable is properly connected and if the network is not
overloaded.
•• The wireless connection between the DLNA compatible device and the
player is unstable.
Check the connection.
AllShare connection between TV and PC is
unstable.
•• The IP address under the same subnetwork should be unique. If they are
not, IP interference can cause this phenomenon.
•• Check if you have a firewall enabled.
If so, disable the firewall function.
60
English
I cannot connect to the BD-LIVE server.
•• Check whether the network connection is successful or not by using the
Network Status menu. (See page 34)
•• Check whether the USB memory device is connected to the player.
•• The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate
the BD-LIVE service.
You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 35)
•• Check whether the BD-LIVE Internet Connection menu is set to Allow(All).
•• If all above fails, contact the contents provider or update the player to the
latest firmware.
When using the BD-LIVE service, an error
occurs.
•• The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate
the BD-LIVE service.
You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 35)
✎✎ NOTE
▪▪ When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data is deleted.
Repairs
If you contact us to repair your player, an administration fee may be charged if either:
111 An engineer is called out to your home at your request and there is no defect in the product.
222 You bring the unit to a repair center and there is no defect in the product.
We will provide you with the amount of the administration fee before we make a home visit or begin any
work on your player.
We recommend you read this manually thoroughly, search for a solution on line at www.samsung.com, or
contact Samsung Customer Care before seeking to repair your player.
English
61
Appendix
BD-LIVE
SOLUTION
08
PROBLEM
Appendix
A
Accessories
AllShare
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
Audio Language
14
58
35
43~44
B
Background Music
47
BD Data Management
35
BD-LIVE
35, 58
BD Wise
26
BONUSVIEW
44
C
Camera Angle
Contact Samsung
44
39
D
Digital Output
28~30
Disc Menu
40
Disc Structure
40
Disc Types
10~12
Downmixing Mode
30
Dynamic Range Control
30
H
HDMI Deep Color
I
Initial Settings
J
JPEG
62
28
35
47
English
K
Index
Keypad
M
Movie Frame (24Fs)
MP3
N
Network Settings
P
PCM Downsampling
Popup Menu
Progressive Mode
51
28
45~46
31~35
30
41
28
R
Region Code
12
Remote Control
17
Remote Control Sensor
15
Resolution
26~27
S
Samsung Apps
Slide Show
Smart Hub
Software Upgrade
Subtitle Language
T
Title Menu
TV Aspect
56~58
47
49~56
37~39
44
41
26
U
USB Storage Device W
Wired Network
Wireless Network
Z
Zoom
48
31~32
32~34
47
DVD (Digital Versatile Disc)
Disc
CD : 5 inches (COMPACT DISC)
CD : 3 1/2 inches (COMPACT DISC)
Video Output
Composite Video
Video/Audio
HDMI
2 Channel
Digital Audio Output
Audio Output
*Frequency Response
*S/N Ratio
*Dynamic Range
*Total Harmonic Distortion
Ethernet
Wireless LAN
Network
Security
WPS(PBC)
1.7 kg
433 (W) X 205 (D) X 43 (H) mm
+5°C to +35°C
10 % to 75 %
Reading Speed : 9.834 m/sec
Reading Speed : 6.98 ~ 7.68 m/sec
Approx. Play Time (Single Sided, Single Layer Disc) : 135 min.
Reading Speed : 4.8 ~ 5.6 m/sec.
Maximum Play Time : 74 min.
Reading Speed : 4.8 ~ 5.6 m/sec.
Maximum Play Time : 20 min.
1 Channel : 1.0 Vp-p (75Ω load)
Blu-ray Disc/DVDs : 576i/480i
1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p
PCM multichannel audio, Bitstream audio
L(1/L), R(2/R)
Optical
48 kHz Sampling : 4 Hz to 22 kHz
96 kHz Sampling : 4 Hz to 44 kHz
110 dB
100 dB
0.003%
10/100BASE-TX Terminal
Supports when the player is connected with the Samsung
Wireless LAN Adapter. (Model Name : WIS09ABGN)
WEP (OPEN/SHARED)
WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)
WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)
Supported
*: Nominal specification
-- Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
-- For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
-- Weight and dimensions are approximate.
English
63
Appendix
General
Weight
Dimensions
Operating Temperature Range
Operating Humidity Range
BD (Blu-ray Disc)
08
Specifications
Appendix
Compliance and Compatibility Notice
NOT ALL discs are compatible
•• Subject to the restrictions described below and those noted throughout this Manual, including the Disc
Type and Characteristics section of this user manual, disc types that can be played are: pre-recorded
commercial BD-ROM, DVD-VIDEO, and Audio CD (CD-DA) discs; BD-RE/-R, DVD-RW/-R discs; and
CD-RW/-R discs.
•• Discs other than the above cannot and/or is not intended to be played by this player. And some of the
above discs may not play due to one or more reasons provided below.
•• Samsung cannot assure that this player will play every disc bearing the BD-ROM, BD-RE/-R,
DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R and CD-RW/-R logos, and this player may not respond to
all operating commands or operate all features of every disc. These and other disc compatibility and
player operation issues with new and existing format discs are possible because:
-- Blu-ray is a new and evolving format and this player may not operate all features of Blu-ray Discs
because some features may be optional, additional features may have been added to the Blu-ray
Disc format after the production of this player, and certain available features may be subject to
delayed availability;
-- not all new and existing disc format versions are supported by this player;
-- new and existing disc formats may be revised, changed, updated, improved and/or supplemented;
-- some discs are produced in a manner that allows specific or limited operation and feature during
playback;
-- some features may be optional, additional features may have been added after the production of this
player or certain available features may be subject to delayed availability;
-- some discs bearing the BD-ROM, BD-RE/-R, DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW/-R, DVD+RW/+R and
CD-RW/-R logos may still be non-standardized discs;
-- some discs may not be played depending on their physical state or recording conditions;
-- problems and errors can occur during the creation of Blu-ray Disc, DVD software and/or the
manufacture of discs;
-- this player operates differently than a standard DVD player or other AV equipment; and/or
-- for reasons noted throughout this user manual and for other reason(s) discovered and posted by
SAMSUNG customer care center.
•• If you encounter disc compatibility or player operation problems, please contact SAMSUNG customer
care center.
You may also contact SAMSUNG customer care center for possible updates on this player.
•• For additional information on playback restrictions and disc compatibility, refer to the Precautions,
Before Reading the user manual, Disc Types and Characteristics, and Before Playing sections of this
user manual.
Copy Protection
•• Because AACS (Advanced Access Content System) is approved as content protection system for
Blu-ray Disc format, similar to use of CSS (Content Scramble System) for DVD format, certain
restrictions are imposed on playback, analog signal output, etc., of AACS protected contents.
The operation of this product and restrictions on this product may vary depending on your time of
purchase as those restrictions may be adopted and/or changed by AACS after the production of this
product. Furthermore, BD-ROM Mark and BD+ are additionally used as content protection system for
Blu-ray Disc format, which imposes certain restrictions including playback restrictions for BD-ROM
Mark and/or BD+ protected contents. To obtain additional information on AACS, BD-ROM Mark, BD+,
or this product, please contact SAMSUNG customer care center.
64
English
All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are
provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a
manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the
foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may
not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or
distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT
CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE.
SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SAMSUNG
DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS
OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN
CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF ANY
CONTENT OR SERVICE BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no representation
or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services
are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung
has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any
responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any content or service made available
through this device.
Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services.
Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
English
65
Appendix
Network Service Disclaimer
08
•• Many Blu-ray Disc/DVDs are encoded with copy protection. Because of this, you should only connect
your Player directly to your TV, not to a VCR. Connecting to a VCR results in a distorted picture from
copy-protected Blu-ray Disc/DVDs.
•• This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
•• Under the U.S. Copyright laws and Copyright laws of other countries, unauthorized recording, use,
display, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, Blu-ray Discs, DVDs, and other
materials may subject you to civil and/or criminal liability.
•• For Blu-ray Disc Player progressive scan output : CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT
ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS product AND
MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS product, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
Appendix
License
•• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
•• Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s : 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;
5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and
the Symbol are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are
trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
2.0+Digital Out
•• DivX
-- ABOUT DIVX VIDEO : DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc.
This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video.
Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
-- ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND : This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to
play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the
DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to
complete your registration.
-- DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.
-- DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.
-- Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.
••The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks
or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
•• Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names
may be trademarks of their respective owners
•• This license is limited to private non-commercial use by end-user consumers for licensed contents.
No rights are granted for commercial use. The license does not cover any product unit other than this
product unit and the license does not extend to any unlicensed product unit or process conforming to
ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3 used or sold in combination with this product unit.
The license only covers the use of this product unit to encode and/or decode audio files conforming to
the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3. No rights are granted under this license for product features
or functions that do not conform to the ISO/IEC 11172-3 or ISO/IEC 13818-3.
•• Open Source License Notice
-- In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the product
menu.
•• Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™ and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
•• This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.
66
English
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG
customer care center.
Area
` North America
Contact Center 
Web Site
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Colombia
Costa Rica
Dominica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Honduras
Jamaica
Nicaragua
Panama
Peru
Puerto Rico
Trinidad &
Tobago
Venezuela
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421 / 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-8000112112
0-800-507-7267
1-800-751-2676
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
800-7919267
1-800-234-7267
00-1800-5077267
800-7267
0-800-777-08
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
0-800-100-5303
www.samsung.com
Albania
42 27 5755
0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
-
` Latin America
` Europe
Austria
Belgium
02-201-24-18
Bosnia
Bulgaria
Croatia
05 133 1999
07001 33 11
062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864)
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační
složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
70 70 19 70
030 - 6227 515
01 48 63 00 00
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864
€ 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
+381 0113216899
261 03 710
023 207 777
020 405 888
0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
815-56 480
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)
/ 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1. 08010 SAMSUNG (72678) doar din reţeaua Romtelecom,
tarif local
2. 021.206.01.10 - din orice
reţea, tarif normal
Czech
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Kosovo
Luxemburg
Macedonia
Montenegro
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Rumania
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/
be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Area
Serbia
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
Contact Center 
0700 Samsung (0700 726
7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
Switzerland
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
U.k
Eire
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717100
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
Russia
Georgia
Armenia
Azerbaijan
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-555-55-55
8-800-555-555
0-800-05-555
088-55-55-555
8-10-800-500-55-500
(GSM: 7799)
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Ukraine
0-800-502-000
Belarus
Moldova
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
Australia
New Zealand
China
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858 / 010-6475 1880
Hong Kong
(852) 3698 4698
` CIS
Kazakhstan
` Asia Pacific
Web Site
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/(French)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
3030 8282 / 1800 110011 /
1800 3000 8282 / 1800 266 8282
0800-112-8888 /
021-5699-7777
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) /
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) /
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) /
02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232 / 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
Bahrain
Egypt
Jordan
Morocco
Oman
Saudi Arabia
Turkey
U.A.E
8000-4726
08000-726786
800-22273
080 100 2255
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
9200-21230
444 77 11
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Nigeria
South Africa
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Philippines
` Middle East
` Africa
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
AK68-02016A-00
‫‪BD-D5300‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻔﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ™‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻜﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ – ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻄﺎ ًﻗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪AllShare‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ‪ ،AVC‬ﻭ‪ ،VC-1‬ﻭ‪.MPEG-2‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ (NAS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ x 1080 1920‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ‪ x 720 1280‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪) HDTV‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ OUT‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ BD-LIVE‬ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ ،MP3، JPEG، DivX‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠٢‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ“ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻙ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﺧﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ‪ CE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺼﻼﺕ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺼﺒﻮﺏ ﻳﻀﻢ ﻣﺼﻬﺮًﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ‪ BS1362‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻬﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎﺀ ﻗﺎﺑﻼً ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻣﺼﻬﺮ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﻮﻳﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻭﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺁﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ 3-ISO/IEC 11172‬ﺃﻭ ‪ISO/‬‬
‫‪ 3-IEC 13818‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﺤﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪3-ISO/IEC 11172‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ .3-ISO/IEC 13818‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺣﻴﺎﻝ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ 3-ISO/IEC 11172‬ﺃﻭ ‪.3-ISO/IEC 13818‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻔﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﺒﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﺳﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ً‬
‫ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﻘﻼﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١٣‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٤‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺴﻜﺐ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻌﺖ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ )ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻟﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺧﺰﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﺒﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD-VIDEO‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٠٢‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺬﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺨﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻷﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• * ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻼً‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﺑﻘﻠﻢ ﺣﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﻨﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪) .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻻﺻﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺸﺮﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻘﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻣﺰﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲﺀ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺷﻐﻠﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،POWER‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎﺀ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻫﺮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺟﺎﻫﺰًﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻒ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺟﺎﺀ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻻ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،CD‬ﻷﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD‬ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼﺀ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪SAMSUNG‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻐﺸﻤﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻐﺸﻤﻠﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪– HDMI‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫‪) BD Wise‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫– ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ – (DTS‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ( – ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪BD‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫‪DivX® Video On Demand‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Network Remote Control‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪(D‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ - Edit Mode‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ )‪(C‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ - Sort‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )‪(B‬‬
‫‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫™‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪AllShare‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪MP3/(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪MP3/(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪:‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫✎‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BD-RE/-R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.BD-RE‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪/DVD+RW‬‬
‫‪ DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪BD-RE/-R‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﺃﻭ ‪ MKV‬ﺃﻭ ‪.MP4‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪) CD-RW/-R‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪BD-RE/-R‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WMA‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ BD-RE/-R‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﻭ‪ DVD-R‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ BD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫• ‪HD DVD‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DVD-ROM/PD/‬‬
‫‪ ،MV‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫• ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ‪(CD‬‬
‫• ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
‫• ‪CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/‬‬
‫‪CD-G/CD-I/LD‬‬
‫)ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-G‬ﺗﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪3.9‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪BD-RE/-R‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﺎﺋﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray RE/-R‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪BD-RE/-R‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،BD-J‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺒﻂﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،CD‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺟﺎﺀ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻴﺒﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫▪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻭ ‪،DVD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،CD‬ﻷﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺗﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD‬ﻭ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻼﺀ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ Blu-ray‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺘﻄﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.Blu-ray ROM‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪BD-ROM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ (DVD-VIDEO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺧﻠﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD-RW/-R/+R‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD-‬‬
‫‪ RW/-R/+R‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD+RW‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ DVD+RW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-‬‬
‫‪ RW/-R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.CD-DA‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫‪ ٠٣‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD-RW/-R‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 700‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)‪ 80‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 800‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)‪ 90‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻠﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪CD-‬‬
‫‪ RW/-R‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫‪Disc‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻨﻼﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺼﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻨﻼﻧﺪ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﻔﺎﺀﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫)‪(AVCHD‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .AVCHD‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪."x.v.Color‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪."x.v.Color‬‬
‫• "‪ "x.v.Color‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Sony‬‬
‫‪.Corporation‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺪ "‪ "AVCHD‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd‬‬
‫ﻭﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫✎‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻼﻧﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺒﻲ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ً ،AVCHD‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.AVCHD‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ "‪ "x.v.Color‬ﻧﻄﺎ ًﻗﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ ،DivX‬ﻭ‪ ،MKV‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ً ،MP4‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2011‬ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺀ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Samsung Electronics‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.Co., Ltd‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺸﻐﻠﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ ،MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ 128‬ﺣﺮ ًﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ USB /‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻢ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ‪ FAT32‬ﻭ‪.NTFS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺮﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪.PTP‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪) DRM‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*.avi‬‬
‫‪AVI‬‬
‫‪*.mkv‬‬
‫‪MKV‬‬
‫‪*.wmv‬‬
‫)‪WMV (wmv9‬‬
‫‪*.mp4‬‬
‫‪MP4‬‬
‫‪*.mpg‬‬
‫‪*.mpeg‬‬
‫‪PS‬‬
‫*‪tp.‬‬
‫‪TS‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫‪DivX 3.11/4.x/5.1/6.0‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪AC3‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪DivX 5.1/6.0‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪AC3‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪MP4v3‬‬
‫‪H.264 BP/MP/HP‬‬
‫)‪MP4 (mp4v‬‬
‫‪H.264 BP/MP/HP‬‬
‫‪MPEG1‬‬
‫‪MPEG2‬‬
‫‪H.264 BP/MP/HP‬‬
‫‪MPEG2‬‬
‫*‪ts.‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪H.264 BP/MP/HP‬‬
‫‪VC-1 AP‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪VC-1 AP‬‬
‫‪VC-1 SM‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪AAC‬‬
‫‪MP1, 2‬‬
‫‪AC3‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪AC3‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪AAC‬‬
‫‪H.264‬‬
‫*‪trp.‬‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫‪+DD‬‬
‫‪VC-1‬‬
‫‪HE-AAC‬‬
‫‪1920×1080‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫‪ ٠٣‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪*.mp3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪MP3‬‬
‫‪*.wma‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫‪WMA‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ WMA‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪10‬‬
‫* ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( – ‪48 ،44.1 ،32 ،22 ،16 ،11 ،8‬‬
‫* ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ – ﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 5‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 384‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DTS-HD‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫‪Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺚ ‪ PAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫‪DivX‬‬
‫‪Java‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪(AAA‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ ٠٣‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٤ ٥ ٦‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ USB‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .BD-LIVE‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪.MP3 / JPEG / DivX / MKV / MP4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ‪ Play Movie‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Start‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١ ٢‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪ (WIS09ABGN‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(٥٨‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،BD-LIVE‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪VIDEO OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪DIGITAL AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٠٣‬ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻘﺮﺹ ‪.Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ )ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪(Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻭﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Tools‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻗﻄﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ –‪.+/‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻫﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫▪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ – HDMI‬ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺬﻟﻚ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻮﺗًﺎ ‪ /‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻮﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI 720p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،1080p‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺫﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.(2‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪) HDCP‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Deep Colour‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ Off‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ‪ AV Out‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Digital Audio Out‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻓﻴﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻸﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪) VIDEO OUT‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ‪) AUDIO OUT /‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪) VIDEO IN‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ( ‪) AUDIO IN /‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ "‪ "VIDEO‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٢١‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫!‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫‪ ٠٤‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ – ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ‪ً HDMI‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫– ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫‪ (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪DIGITAL AUDIO IN‬‬
‫‪ ((OPTICAL‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ )ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ( ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪) OUT‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ‬
‫‪) AUDIO IN‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ( ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ )ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ( ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ VIDEO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ VIDEO IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Digital Output‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫‪ ٠٤‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ – (DTS‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ(‬
‫– ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٥٨‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،BD-LIVE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )‪(AP‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ IP‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،(UTP‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٣٥‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫)ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ(‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪AllShare‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.(ISP‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪ ،DSL‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،AllShare‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ AP / IP‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ( ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٣٥‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ IP‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪AllShare‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.(WIS09ABGN :‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ IP‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪) .IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ n‬ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬
‫‪(WEP (OPEN/SHARED)، WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES)، WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ TKIP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ 802.11n‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ‪.WiFi‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،AllShare‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪ ٠٤‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪My Contents‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Initial‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.Settings‬‬
‫‪Videos‬‬
‫‪Photos‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫‪My Devices‬‬
‫‪Initial Settings | On-Screen Language‬‬
‫‪Select a language for the on-screen displays.‬‬
‫‪Suomi‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫‪Nederlands‬‬
‫‪Italiano‬‬
‫‪Deutsch‬‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫‪Polski‬‬
‫‪Norsk‬‬
‫‪한국어‬‬
‫‪Español‬‬
‫‪Русский‬‬
‫‪Português‬‬
‫‪Türkçe‬‬
‫‪Svenska‬‬
‫)‪d WPS(PBC‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺧﻠﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (D‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ )‪ Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ (.١‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ )‪ Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ On‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭ ‪ (.٢‬ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪m Move " Enter‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Start‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ‪ ،Wired‬ﺃﻭ )‪،Wireless (General‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ )‪ WPS(PBC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،One Foot Connection‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ )‪ (D‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(.٢٥‬‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ EXIT‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :MENU‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :RETURN‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ :EXIT‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung Apps‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٥٨‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.POWER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫‪My Contents‬‬
‫‪Videos‬‬
‫‪Photos‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪My Devices‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪d WPS(PBC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪My Devices‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪My Contents‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Internet‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Settings‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Settings‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Original‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ .16:9‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 4:3‬ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Full‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ .16:9‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﺘﻤﻸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪4:3‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Letter Box‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ 16:9‬ﺑﺄﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Pan-Scan‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ .4:3‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.16:9‬‬
‫✎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫▪‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Original 16:9‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ ‪) Pillarbox 4:3‬ﺃﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Size 1‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Size 2‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ .Hub‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Size 3‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪) BD Wise‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Samsung‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ BD Wise‬ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪،HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞٍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﺗﻈﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Resolution‬ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫‪.Disc/DVD‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،BD Wise‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،BD Wise‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.Resolution‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،BD Wise‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.BD Wise‬‬
‫▪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.On‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،1080p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،1080i‬ﺃﻭ ‪،720p‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،576p/480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .576i/480i‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪ p‬ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : BD Wise‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫‪Disc/DVD‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪) .BD Wise‬ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ BD Wise‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪BD‬‬
‫‪ Wise‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .On‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪ BD Wise‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :1080p‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ً 1080‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : 1080i‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ً 1080‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : 720p‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ً 720‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ‪ : 576p/480p‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ً 576/480‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫• ‪ : 576i/480i‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ً 576/480‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻃﺒﻘً ﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ / Blu-ray‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ / HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ / HDMI‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫‪1080p@60F‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪1080p@60F‬‬
‫‪1080p@60F‬‬
‫‪1080p@60F‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ(‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪1080p@24F‬‬
‫‪1080p@24F‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪BD Wise‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪576p/480p‬‬
‫‪576p/480p‬‬
‫‪576p/480p‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪BD Wise‬‬
‫✎‬
‫‪ / HDMI‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ / HDMI‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪VIDEO‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪Auto‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪1080p@60F‬‬
‫‪1080p@60F‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪1080i‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪720p‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪576p/480p‬‬
‫‪576p/480p‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪576i/480i‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪If no‬‬
‫‪pictures are shown after selecting ‘Yes’, please wait‬‬
‫‪for 15 seconds to return to the previous resolution.‬‬
‫‪Do you want to change the resolution‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Yes‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Setup‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫(‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• )‪ : YCbCr (4:4:4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ‪ YCbCr‬ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ YCbCr‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• )‪ : RGB (Standard‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Frame‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎ ًﻓﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ‪ : Field‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎ ًﻓﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻣﻲ‬
‫• )‪ : RGB (Enhanced‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ DVI‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Auto‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ HDMI 1080i‬ﺃﻭ ‪.1080p‬‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭًﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Video‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ : PCM‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• )‪ : Bitstream (Unprocessed‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ Dolby TrueHD‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.DTS-HD Master Audio‬‬
‫• )‪ : Bitstream (Re-encoded DTS‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‬
‫‪.DTS‬‬
‫• )‪ : Bitstream (Re-encoded Dolby D‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪Bitstream‬‬
‫)‪(Unprocessed‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 7.1‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪Plus‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪Plus‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ ‪Dolby Digital Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪DTS-HD HRA‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ ‪DTS-HD HRA‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪DTS-HD MA‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪DTS-HD MA‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪DVD‬‬
‫‪PCM‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
‫‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫‪Bitstream‬‬
‫‪(Re-encode‬‬
‫‪Bitstream‬‬
‫‪(Re-encode‬‬
‫)‪DTS‬‬
‫)‪Dolby‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ DTS‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ً BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ً BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺖ ‪.DTS‬‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ *‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫‪DTS‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ‬
‫‪ً BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪ PCM‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺖ ‪Dolby digital‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻫﻮ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪ ."Re-encoded Dolby D‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪ LPCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ :BONUSVIEW‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﺿﺠﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪) HDMI‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ )‪Dolby digital،‬‬
‫‪ ،(DTS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ‬
‫)ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪،MPEG‬‬
‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ PCM‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ PCM‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪PCM‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻭﺧﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪.PCM‬‬
‫• ‪ : Normal Stereo‬ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.Dolby Pro Logic‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪96‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻭﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 96‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ‪ PCM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Off‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻨﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ )‪ ،(Dolby Digital، DTS‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ )ﺳﻮﺍﺀ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ( ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪PCM‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PCM 48‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ‪ PCM‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.Off‬‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫• ‪ : Surround Compatible‬ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﺧﻠﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫‪.Dolby Pro Logic‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ )‪(ISP‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﺃﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﺤﻦ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺎ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪ WPS(PBC‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪.One Foot Connection‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ – ‪Auto‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Wired‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪ngs‬‬
‫‪Network Settings‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Select a network connection type.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ً‬
‫‪Connect to the network using LAN cable. Please make‬‬
‫‪sure that the LAN cable is connected.‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Wired‬‬
‫‪Network‬‬
‫‪Wireless‬‬
‫)‪(General‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Languagee‬‬
‫)‪WPS(PBC‬‬
‫‪Security‬‬
‫‪One Foot‬‬
‫‪Connection‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Settings‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Network‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Network‬‬
‫‪ ،Settings‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Wired‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)‪ ،Wireless (General‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPS(PBC‬ﺃﻭ ‪One‬‬
‫‪ ،Foot Connection‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Wired‬‬
‫‪ Network‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٣٤‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪Support‬‬
‫‪> Move " Enter ' Return‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .Network Status‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ – ‪Manual‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ً IP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ƒ ‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.Windows‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Status‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.Support‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Support‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Details‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪Windows 7‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Windows‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Network and‬‬
‫‪.Sharing Center‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Local Area‬‬
‫‪ Connection‬ﺃﻭ ‪Wireless Network Connection‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Support‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Details‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Wired‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،IP Settings‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Network Status‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Cancel‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪ngs‬‬
‫‪IP Settings‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪IP Mode‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪IP Address‬‬
‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬
‫‪Gateway‬‬
‫‪DNS Mode‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪DNS Server‬‬
‫‪Network‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Languagee‬‬
‫‪Security‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Support‬‬
‫‪> Move " Enter ' Return‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.IP Mode‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Manual‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫)‪.(IP Address‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ►‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ ،IP Address‬ﻭ ‪ ،Subnet Mask‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Gateway‬‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.DNS Mode‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ‪ .DNS‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.OK‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .Network Status‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻋﺎﻡ(‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ )‪WPS(PBC‬‬
‫• ‪One Foot Connection‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪Auto -‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻣﻨﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺚ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻣﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻔﺮ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )‪.Wireless (General‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪ettings‬‬
‫‪Network Settings‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪spla‬‬
‫‪Select a network connection type.‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪udio‬‬
‫‪Network‬‬
‫‪ettwo‬‬
‫‪Wired‬‬
‫‪Set up wireless network by selecting your Wireless‬‬
‫‪Router. You may need to enter security key depending‬‬
‫‪on the setting of the Wireless Router.‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪yste‬‬
‫‪Wireless‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪anguu‬‬
‫)‪(General‬‬
‫‪Security‬‬
‫)‪ecur WPS(PBC‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪ener‬‬
‫‪One Foot‬‬
‫‪Support‬‬
‫‪uppo Connection‬‬
‫‪> Move " Enter ' Return‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Security‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪ngs‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Network Settings‬‬
‫‪0 entered‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Enter security key.‬‬
‫‪Network‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪u‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Done‬‬
‫‪Space‬‬
‫‪a/A‬‬
‫‪a Previous m Move " Enter ' Return‬‬
‫✎‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Network and‬‬
‫‪.Sharing Center‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Local Area‬‬
‫‪ Connection‬ﺃﻭ ‪Wireless Network Connection‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Support‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Details‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Languagee‬‬
‫‪Security‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪Support‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪."Auto-‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪ (B‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ►◄▲▼‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Done‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Network Status‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻹ ﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Windows‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪ngs‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )‪ (B‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Done‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .Network Status‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪IP Settings‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪IP Mode‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪Manual‬‬
‫‪IP Address‬‬
‫‪Network‬‬
‫‪Subnet Mask‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Gateway‬‬
‫‪DNS Mode‬‬
‫‪0 . 0 . 0 . 0‬‬
‫‪DNS Server‬‬
‫‪Languagee‬‬
‫‪Security‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪Support‬‬
‫‪> Move " Enter ' Return‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪Manual -‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،Network Status‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،Cancel‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،IP Settings‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.IP Mode‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Manual‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫)‪.(IP Address‬‬
‫ƒ ‪Windows XP‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.Windows‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Status‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.Support‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Support‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Details‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Security‬‬
‫ƒ ‪Windows 7‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
.‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
.٨
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
ً
Samsung ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬.One Foot Connection ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
:‫ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬،One Foot Connection ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
► ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬،‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ‬
.‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
ً ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
.‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬
.٩
One Foot ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
.Connection
.١
.DNS Mode ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬.١١
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬.١٢
.‫ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬.DNS ‫ﻓﻲ‬
Settings
ettings
Network Settings
Display
spla
Select a network connection type.
udio
Audio
.‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬.١٣
Network
ettwo
System
yste
‫ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬.Network Status ‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬.١٤
.‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
Wired
Wireless
Language
angu
(General)
Security
ecur WPS(PBC)
General
enerr
One Foot
Support
uppoo Connection
‫ ﻭ‬،Subnet Mask ‫ ﻭ‬،IP Address ‫ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻢ‬.١٠
.Gateway
Connect to the wireless network automatically if your
Wireless Router supports One Foot Connection. Select
this connection type after placing the Wireless Router
within 10 inches (25Cm) of Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter.
WPS(PBC)
> Move " Enter ' Return
.‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
.٢
Samsung ‫ﺿﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬
‫ ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬10) ‫ ﺳﻢ‬25 ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
.٣
.‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
ً
.٤
‫ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
One Foot ‫ ﺃﻭ‬PBC(WPS) ‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
.Connection
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
:‫ ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬،WPS(PBC) ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
.WPS(PBC) ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
.١
Settings
ettings
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
Network Settings
Display
spla
Select a network connection type.
Audio
udio
Network
ettwo
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺄﺳﻴﺲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
.‫ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬
Settings
ettings
MAC Address
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
Audio
udio
Network
ettwo
KT_WLAN
System
yste
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Language
angu Internet is connected successfully.
If you have a problem using any Internet services, contact your Internet service
provider.
Security
ecur
General
ener
Support
uppo Network Settings
IP Settings
Wired
Language
angu Wireless
(General)
Security
ecurr
WPS(PBC)
General
enerr One Foot
Support
uppo Connection
Connect to the Wireless Router easily by pressing the
WPS(PBC) button. Choose this if your Wireless Router
supports Push Button Configuration(PBC).
> Move " Enter ' Return
Network Status
Display
spla
System
yste
Retry
OK
< Move " Enter ' Return
.‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
.٢
‫ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬WPS(PBC) ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬.‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‬
ً
.‫ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺘﻚ‬
.٣
‫ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬.Network Status ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
.٤
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
۳٤
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.CEC‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،+Anynet‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.+Anynet‬‬
‫• )‪ : Allow (All‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫▪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• )‪ : Allow (Valid Only‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ BD-LIVE‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Prohibit‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻷﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ؟‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ‪ BD-LIVE‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻭﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻟﺤﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭًﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪BD‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،BD‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪:BD Data Management‬‬
‫• ‪ : Total Size‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Available Size‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪) FAT‬ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ (DOS 8.3‬ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪ ،USB 2.0‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪BD‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪.+Anynet‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ ،+Anynet‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.+Anynet‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪.+Anynet‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪ngs‬‬
‫‪Time Zone‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪Network‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Languagee‬‬
‫‪Security‬‬
‫‪GMT + 00:00‬‬
‫‪General‬‬
‫‪London, Lisbon, Casablanca‬‬
‫‪Support‬‬
‫‪< Change " Save ' Return‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻋﻤﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻧﻀﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﺘﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻀﺠﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪DivX® Video On Demand‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ DivX® VOD‬ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺀ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.DivX® VOD‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On-Screen Menu‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫• ‪ : Disc Menu‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Audio‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Subtitle‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫✎‬
‫( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Auto‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Software Upgrade‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻊ ﻃﺮﻕ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ : Dim‬ﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪By Internet‬‬
‫• ‪ : Bright‬ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪By USB‬‬
‫• ‪By Disc‬‬
‫‪Network Remote Control‬‬
‫• ‪) By Downloaded‬ﻣﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪By Internet‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،By Internet‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪.Connecting to Server‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ On‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Network Remote Control‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪Download‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪Upgrade Query‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻫﻲ ‪ Upgrade Now‬ﺃﻭ ‪Upgrade‬‬
‫‪ Later‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Don’t Upgrade‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ‪ ،Upgrade Now‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.Allow‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،Upgrade Later‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.By Downloaded‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Don’t Upgrade‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.By Internet‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪By USB‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Settings > Support‬‬
‫‪.> Software Upgrade‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.By Disc‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪www.samsung.com/‬‬
‫‪bluraysupport‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﺭﺷﻴﻒ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Settings > Support‬‬
‫‪.> Software Upgrade‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪.By USB‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Software Upgrade‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪By Downloaded‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ By Downloaded‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺭﺕ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻓﻮﺭًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،By Downloaded‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪.By Downloaded‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ ،By Downloaded‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﺎﺭ ًﻏﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ .Yes‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Software Upgrade‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫✎‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Software Upgrade‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪By Disc‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪www.samsung.com/‬‬
‫‪.bluraysupport‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﺭﺷﻴﻒ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫‪ CD-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪.DVD-R‬‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪Download in Standby Mode‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٠٥‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Download in‬‬
‫‪ ،Standby Mode‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ On‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Off‬‬
‫• ‪ : Off‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Off‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : On‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،On‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﻋﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،Download in Standby Mode‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻮﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray، DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪٣‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪١‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ /‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ )‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‬
‫( ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪٥‬‬
‫• ‪ ،MP3‬ﻭ‪ ،WMA‬ﻭ‪ ،DivX‬ﻭ‪ ،MKV‬ﻭ‪MP4‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ( ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‬
‫(‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )‬
‫✎‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺗﲔ ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ /‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪hZ‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫( ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DISC‬‬
‫‪ MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﻭﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TITLE‬‬
‫‪ MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫‪hzZyx‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ)‬
‫▪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ )‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪z‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪DISC‬‬
‫‪ MENU‬ﺃﻭ ‪.TITLE MENU‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Title‬‬
‫‪ ،List‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪BD-ROM,‬‬
‫‪BD-RE/-R,‬‬
‫‪DVD-RW/-R,‬‬
‫‪DVD+RW/+R,‬‬
‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬
‫‪DivX, MKV, MP4‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫­‪)1­)2­)3‬‬
‫‪)4­)5­)6­)7‬‬
‫­‪(1­(2­(3‬‬
‫‪(4­(5­(6­(7‬‬
‫‪)1­)2­)3‬‬
‫‪(1­(2­(3‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ )ﺏ( ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪hzZyx‬‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪POPUP‬‬
‫‪ MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ )‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫▪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫‪ ٠٦‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫‪hzZy‬‬
‫‪hzZyx‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ )‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ )‬
‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪* 1/8 * 1/4 * 1/2‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪..‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪hzZyx‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ )‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫)‬
‫(‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫‪Tools‬‬
‫‪1/2‬‬
‫‪1/20‬‬
‫‪Title Search‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪: 00:00:13/01:34:37‬‬
‫‪Chapter Search‬‬
‫‪Time Search‬‬
‫‪0ff‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Repeat Mode‬‬
‫‪Original‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Full Screen‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Picture Settings‬‬
‫‪1/1 JPN 2CH‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪0/2 Off‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪1/1‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫▼‬
‫‪" Enter ' Return‬‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪< Change‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Title Search‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،Chapter Search‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Time Search‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫‪hzZy‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Tools‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪.Mode‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ Chapter‬ﺃﻭ ‪،Title‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ TOOLS‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Repeat Mode‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Off‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬
‫‪hzZy‬‬
‫‪hzZy‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪.Mode‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪،Picture Settings‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Repeat A-B‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ )‪.(A‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ )‪.(B‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ TOOLS‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Repeat Mode‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Off‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Picture Settings‬‬
‫• ‪ : Dynamic‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Normal‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Movie‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : User‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،BD wise‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )ﺏ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪ ٥‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥٍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻈﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫▪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪hzZx‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AUDIO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Full Screen‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻫﻲ ‪ 16:9‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Audio‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ►◄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻢ‬
‫‪ً BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫‪.BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ►◄ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ‪.BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫‪ ٠٦‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32‬ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ LPCM‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Dolby‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ AUDIO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪hZ‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.ANGLE‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Angle‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪hZx‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Subtitle‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫‪.Bonusview‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪Tools‬‬
‫‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،Blu-ray Disc / DVD‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.DISC MENU‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray Disc/‬‬
‫‪.DVD‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪: 00:00:13/01:34:37‬‬
‫‪Time Search‬‬
‫‪0ff‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Repeat Mode‬‬
‫‪Original‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Full Screen‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Picture Settings‬‬
‫‪1/1 JPN 2CH‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Audio‬‬
‫‪0/2 Off‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Subtitle‬‬
‫‪1/1‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Angle‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪0/1 Off‬‬
‫‪BONUSVIEW Video‬‬
‫‪BONUSVIEW Audio :‬‬
‫‪' Return‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 255‬ﻟﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫‪ Video‬ﺃﻭ ‪.BONUSVIEW Audio‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫‪ BONUSVIEW‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ‬
‫‪.BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Bonusview‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ SUBTITLE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،BONUSVIEW Video‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟـ ‪BONUSVIEW‬‬
‫‪ BONUSVIEW Audio‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.Video‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ow‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪MP3/(CD-DA‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎ )‪ (CD-DA‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪،(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Music‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪MP3/(CD-DA‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ )‪ : (C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ : SEARCH‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪ (CD-DA‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ ▲▼ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪1/13‬‬
‫‪TRACK 001‬‬
‫‪TRACK 001‬‬
‫‪00:43‬‬
‫‪TRACK 002‬‬
‫‪03:56‬‬
‫‪TRACK 003‬‬
‫‪04:41‬‬
‫‪TRACK 004‬‬
‫‪04:02‬‬
‫‪00:13 / 00:43‬‬
‫‪" Enter < Page / Tools ' Return‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Audio CD‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪ ٠٦‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺛﻮﺍ ٍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ )‪.(C‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Audio CD Music‬‬
‫‪1/2 Page‬‬
‫‪Selected Items : 3‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)‪MP3/(CD-DA‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Repeat‬‬
‫‪ ،Mode‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Shuffle Mode‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ►◄ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ On‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Off‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) One Song‬‬
‫‪) All‬‬
‫‪03:56‬‬
‫‪00:43‬‬
‫‪TRACK 004‬‬
‫‪TRACK 003‬‬
‫‪04:02‬‬
‫‪04:41‬‬
‫‪TRACK 006‬‬
‫‪TRACK 005‬‬
‫‪03:40‬‬
‫‪03:43‬‬
‫‪TRACK 008‬‬
‫‪TRACK 007‬‬
‫‪03:52‬‬
‫‪04:06‬‬
‫‪ Close Edit Mode ( ) Page / Tools " Select ' Return‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪،Play Selected‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪TRACK 002‬‬
‫‪TRACK 001‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪1/13‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪TRACK 001‬‬
‫‪) Shuffle Mode‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪00:43‬‬
‫‪TRACK 002‬‬
‫‪03:56‬‬
‫‪TRACK 003‬‬
‫‪04:41‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺻﺎ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺎ )‪ (CD-DA‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪،(CD-DA‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،MP3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Music‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.RETURN‬‬
‫)‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Music List‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪00:13 / 00:43‬‬
‫‪" Enter / Tools ' Return‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪TRACK 001‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫✎‬
‫‪Audio CD‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.RETURN‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 99‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪.(CD-DA‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،Photos‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫• ‪ : Information‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Start Slide‬‬
‫‪ ،Show‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ TOOLS‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.TOOLS‬‬
‫‪Tools‬‬
‫‪Pause Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Blind‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Tools‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Speed :‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Slide Show Effect‬‬
‫‪Background Music :‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪Background Music :‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪Information‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪" Enter ' Return‬‬
‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪Information‬‬
‫‪" Enter ' Return‬‬
‫• ‪ : Start Slide Show‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Pause Slide‬‬
‫‪ ،Show‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Background Music‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Background Music Setting‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ : Zoom‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫‪ ٠٦‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ‪ : Rotate‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )‪ ،MP3، JPEG، DivX‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪My Contents‬‬
‫‪Videos‬‬
‫‪Photos‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪My Devices‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫)‪d WPS(PBC‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪My Contents‬‬
‫‪Videos‬‬
‫‪Connected‬‬
‫‪PhotosDevice‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫‪123‬‬
‫‪My Devices‬‬
‫‪" Enter ' Return‬‬
‫)‪ Safely Remove USB d WPS(PBC‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ►◄▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤٧‬‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫✎‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫▪‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ )ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ ("Safely Remove USB‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .USB‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ )‪ ،(C‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫▪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪"CD‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫خدمات الشبكة‬
‫قم بقراءة التعليمات التالية قبل استخدام أية خدمة‬
‫شبكة‪.‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬قم بتوصيل المشغل بالشبكة‪.‬‬
‫(انظر الصفحتين ‪ ٢٢‬و ‪)٢٣‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬إذا ظهرت شاشة ‪ ،Country‬فاضغط على الزرين ▲▼‬
‫الختيار دولتك‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪هناك تطبيقات معينة متاحة فقط في بعض الدول‪.‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬تظهر شاشة ‪.Terms of Service Agreement‬‬
‫إذا كنت توافق‪ ،‬فاضغط على الزرين ►◄ لتحديد‬
‫‪ ،Agree‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬قم بتهيئة إعدادات الشبكة‪.‬‬
‫(انظر الصفحات من ‪ ٣١‬إلى ‪)٣٥‬‬
‫استخدام ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫باستخدام ‪ ،Smart Hub‬بإمكانك تشغيل األفالم‬
‫والفيديوهات والموسيقى من اإلنترنت‪ ،‬والوصول للعديد‬
‫من التطبيقات المدفوعة أو المجانية ومشاهدتها على‬
‫التلفاز الخاص بك‪ .‬وتتضمن التطبيقات األخبار‪ ،‬والرياضة‪،‬‬
‫والنشرات الجوية‪ ،‬وأحوال سوق المال‪ ،‬والخرائط‪ ،‬والصور‪،‬‬
‫واأللعاب‪.‬‬
‫أيضا تشغيل هذه الوظيفة‬
‫يمكنك ً‬
‫بالضغط على الزر ‪ SMART HUB‬في وحدة‬
‫التحكم عن بعد‪.‬‬
‫بدء تشغيل ‪ Smart Hub‬للمرة األولى‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪قد تستغرق هذه الشاشات ثوا ٍن قليلة لتظهر‪.‬‬
‫‪٦ .٦‬تظهر شاشة ‪ Service Update‬ويتم تثبيت عدد من‬
‫الخدمات والتطبيقات‪ .‬عند االنتهاء‪ ،‬يتم إغالق تلك‬
‫الشاشة‪ .‬يتم عرض التطبيقات والخدمات التي يتم‬
‫تنزيلها على شاشة ‪ .Smart Hub‬قد يستغرق ذلك‬
‫بعض الوقت‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪يمكن أن يتم إغالق شاشة ‪ Smart Hub‬لبعض الوقت أثناء‬
‫عملية التثبيت‪.‬‬
‫▪قد تظهر بعض الشاشات بعد التثبيت‪ .‬يمكنك أن تضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال إلغالقها أو تركها تنغلق وحدها‪.‬‬
‫‪٧ .٧‬لبدء تطبيق‪ ،‬اضغط على الزرين ▲▼►◄ لتمييز‬
‫األداة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫لبدء تشغيل ‪ Smart Hub‬للمرة األولى‪ ،‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬انتقل إلى القائمة الرئيسية‪.‬‬
‫‪My Contents‬‬
‫‪Videos‬‬
‫‪Photos‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Settings‬‬
‫‪Internet‬‬
‫‪My Devices‬‬
‫)‪d WPS(PBC‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على الزرين ►◄ لتحديد ‪ ،Internet‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫‪ 07‬خدمات الشبكة‬
‫يمكنك االستمتاع بخدمات الشبكة المتنوعة مثل‬
‫‪ Smart Hub‬أو ‪ BD-LIVE‬عن طريق توصيل المشغل‬
‫بالشبكة الخاصة بك‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬تظهر شاشة ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫وفي حاالت قليلة‪ ،‬تظهر شاشة ‪ Country‬على الفور‬
‫بعد ذلك‪.‬‬
‫خدمات الشبكة‬
‫نظرة على ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Contents 4‬‬
‫‪Contents 3‬‬
‫ •أحمر (‪ : )A‬لتسجيل الدخول إلى ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫ •أخضر (‪ : )B‬لفرز التطبيقات‪.‬‬
‫ •أصفر (‪ : )C‬لتحرير التطبيقات‪.‬‬
‫ •أزرق (‪ : )D‬لتغيير إعدادات ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫‪Contents 2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫تعليمات النتنقل ‪ :‬لعرض أزرار التحكم عن بعد التي يمكن‬
‫استخدامها للتنقل في ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫‪Your Video‬‬
‫‪Contents 1‬‬
‫‪Recommended‬‬
‫‪Contents 5‬‬
‫‪Contents 4‬‬
‫‪Contents 3‬‬
‫‪Contents 2‬‬
‫‪Contents 1‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪Contents 6‬‬
‫‪Contents 5‬‬
‫‪Contents 4‬‬
‫‪Contents 3‬‬
‫‪Contents 2‬‬
‫‪Contents 1‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Contents 12‬‬
‫‪Contents 11‬‬
‫‪Contents 10‬‬
‫‪Contents 9‬‬
‫‪Contents 8‬‬
‫‪Contents 7‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪a Login b Sort by c Edit Mode d Settings‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫اإلعالنات‪ :‬لعرض دليل ‪ ،Smart Hub‬ومقدمة عن المشغل‪،‬‬
‫ومقدمات عن التطبيقات الجديدة‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫‪ : Your Video‬توفير التوصيات لملفات الفيديو على حسب‬
‫ذوقك‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ •يساعدك على مشاهدة توصيات األفالم على حسب‬
‫تفضيالتك السابقة‪.‬‬
‫ •يساعدك على اختيار فيلم‪ ،‬وعرض قائمة موفري ‪VOD‬‬
‫(الفيديو على حسب الطلب) التي لديها الفيلم‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫يجعلك تختار موفر اخلدمة لعرض الفيلم‪( .‬التدفق غير‬
‫متاح في بعض املناطق‪).‬‬
‫ •بالنسبة لتعليمات استخدام الفيديو‪ ،‬يُرجى زيارة موقع‬
‫‪.www.samsung.com‬‬
‫‪ : Search‬لتوفير بحث متكامل لموفري الفيديو وأجهزة‬
‫‪ AllShare‬المتصلة‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ •ميكن استخدامه أثناء استخدام ‪( Smart Hub‬باستثناء‬
‫عندما تشاهد قرص ‪.)Blu-ray‬‬
‫ •لسهولة الوصول‪ ،‬قم باستخدام زر ‪ SEARCH‬في جهاز‬
‫التحكم عن بعد‪.‬‬
‫ •للحصول على تعليمات حول استخدام وظيفة البحث‪،‬‬
‫يُرجى زيارة موقع ‪.www.samsung.com‬‬
‫‪ : Samsung Apps‬يمكنك تنزيل العديد من خدمات‬
‫التطبيقات المدفوعة والمجانية‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Recommended‬لعرض المحتويات الموصى بها والتي‬
‫تديرها شركة ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫التطبيقات الخاصة بي ‪ :‬لعرض المعرض الشخصي‬
‫الخاص بك‪ ،‬والذي يمكنك إضافة التطبيقات إليه أو تعديلها‬
‫أو حذفها منه‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪ال تتحمل شركة ‪ Samsung Electronics‬أية مسئولية‬
‫قانونية بسبب أي توقف في خدمة ‪ Smart Hub‬بسبب موفر‬
‫الخدمة ألي أسباب‪.‬‬
‫▪خدمة ‪ Smart Hub‬تقوم بتنزيل ومعالجة البيانات عبر‬
‫اإلنترنت حتى يمكن لك االستمتاع بمحتويات اإلنترنت على‬
‫شاشة التلفاز الخاصة بك‪.‬‬
‫إذا كان اتصال اإلنترنت غير مستقر‪ ،‬فيمكن أن تتأخر الخدمة‬
‫أو أن تتعرض لإلعاقة‪.‬‬
‫وباإلضافة إلى ذلك‪ ،‬يمكن أن يتوقف المشغل عن العمل‬
‫تلقائيا استجابة لألوضاع الموجودة على اإلنترنت‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫إذا حدث ذلك‪ ،‬افحص اتصال اإلنترنت وحاول مرة أخرى‪.‬‬
‫▪يتم توفير خدمات التطبيقات باللغة اإلنجليزية فقط‪ ،‬وقد‬
‫تختلف المحتويات‪ ،‬وف ًقا للمنطقة الخاصة بك‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪لمزيد من المعلومات حول خدمة ‪ ،Smart Hub‬قم بزيارة‬
‫الموقع اإللكتروني الخاص بموفر تلك الخدمة‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪قد تختلف محتويات خدمة ‪ Smart Hub‬حسب إصدار‬
‫البرنامج الثابت للمشغل‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪تكون الخدمات المتوفرة عرضة للتغيير من جانب موفر خدمة‬
‫‪ Smart Hub‬بدون إخطار‪.‬‬
‫ومن خالل وحدة التحكم عن بعد‪ ،‬يمكنك استخدام‬
‫لوحة المفاتيح التي تظهر على الشاشة إلدخال الحروف‬
‫واألرقام والرموز‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪def‬‬
‫‪abc‬‬
‫‪mno‬‬
‫‪jkl‬‬
‫‪ghi‬‬
‫‪wxyz‬‬
‫‪tuv‬‬
‫‪pqrs‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪AB‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪Ab‬‬
‫‪ab‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪Delete‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫–‪.,‬‬
‫‪Shift‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪T9‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫إنشاء حساب‬
‫إلقامة حساب حصري خاص بك‪ ،‬وتهيئة ‪ ،Smart Hub‬قم‬
‫بإنشاء حساب ‪ Smart TV‬لنفسك‪.‬‬
‫وإلنشاء حساب‪ ،‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األحمر (‪ )A‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪ .‬تظهر شاشة ‪.Create Account‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫‪b Input Method / Language: English‬‬
‫‪Contents 4‬‬
‫‪Contents 3‬‬
‫‪Contents 2‬‬
‫‪%‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫لوحة المفاتيح الحالية‪.‬‬
‫تستخدم إلدخال الحروف واألرقام والرموز‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اضغط على أزرار ‪ SUBTITLE‬في وحدة التحكم عن بعد‬
‫لتغيير وضع المدخالت‪.‬‬
‫‪ ab‬أو ‪ Ab‬أو ‪ AB‬أو األرقام أو األيقونات‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫لعرض وضع المدخالت الحالي‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اضغط على الزر األخضر (‪ )B‬في وحدة التحكم عن بعد‬
‫لتغيير أسلوب المدخالت‪ T9( .‬أو ‪)ABC‬‬
‫اضغط على زر ‪ TOOLS‬في وحدة التحكم عن بعد لتغيير‬
‫اللغة‪.‬‬
‫اضغط على زر ‪ AUDIO‬في وحدة التحكم عن بعد لحذف‬
‫حرف‪.‬‬
‫إدخال النص واألرقام والرموز‬
‫إلدخال النص‪ ،‬اضغط على زر الرقم على جهاز التحكم‬
‫عن بعد الذي يتطابق مع الحرف الذي ترغب في إدخاله‪.‬‬
‫اضغط على الزر بسرعة إلدخال حرف ليس الحرف األول‬
‫المدرج على الزر الموجود على لوحة المفاتيح على‬
‫الشاشة‪ .‬على سبيل المثال‪ ،‬إن كنت ترغب إدخال الحرف‬
‫"‪ ،"b‬فاضغط على زر ‪ 2‬على جهاز التحكم عن بعد بسرعة‬
‫مرتين‪ .‬إلدخال الحرف األول المدرج على زر‪ ،‬اضغط على الزر‬
‫ثم ارفع إصبعك ثم انتظر‪.‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Your Video‬‬
‫‪Contents 1‬‬
‫‪Contents 5‬‬
‫‪Contents 4‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Login‬‬
‫‪Contents 3‬‬
‫‪Recommended‬‬
‫]‪Press [Enter‬‬
‫‪Contents 2‬‬
‫‪Press‬‬
‫‪[Enter] xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Contents 1‬‬
‫‪Smart TV ID‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Password‬‬
‫‪ Remember my Smart TV ID and password.‬‬
‫‪Contents 6‬‬
‫‪Contents 5‬‬
‫‪Contents 4‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Cancel‬‬
‫‪Forgot Password‬‬
‫‪Contents 12‬‬
‫‪Contents 11‬‬
‫‪Contents 10‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Contents 3‬‬
‫‪Login‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Create Account‬‬
‫‪Contents 9‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Contents 2‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Contents 1‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪Contents 8‬‬
‫‪Contents 7‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪xxxxxxxx‬‬
‫‪a Login b Sort by c Edit Mode d Settings‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ الختيار ‪Create‬‬
‫‪ ،Account‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬في الشاشة التالية‪ ،‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Smart TV ID‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫تظهر شاشة إدخال ولوحة مفاتيح‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬استخدم لوحة المفاتيح إلدخال عنوان البريد‬
‫اإللكتروني الخاص بك‪ .‬يعمل ذلك بمثابة المعرف‬
‫الخاص بك‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪تعمل لوحة المفاتيح مثل لوحة المفاتيح على الهاتف‬
‫الخلوي‪.‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬وعندما تنتهي‪ ،‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال واختر ‪،OK‬‬
‫ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال مرة أخرى‪ .‬تظهر شاشة‬
‫مجددا‪.‬‬
‫‪Create Account‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٦ .٦‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Password‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫تظهر شاشة إدخال ولوحة مفاتيح‪.‬‬
‫‪٧ .٧‬استخدم لوحة المفاتيح إلدخال كلمة المرور‪.‬‬
‫يمكن أن تكون كلمة المرور أي مزيج من الحروف‬
‫واألرقام والرموز‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪اضغط على الزر األحمر (‪ )A‬في وحدة التحكم عن بعد‬
‫إلظهار أو إخفاء كلمة المرور عند إدخالها‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫‪ 07‬خدمات الشبكة‬
‫استخدام لوحة المفاتيح‬
‫للتحرك داخل النص‪ ،‬استخدم أزرار األسهم‪ .‬لحذف نص‪،‬‬
‫حرك المؤشر إلى يمين الحرف الذي ترغب في حذفه‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر ‪ .AUDIO‬لتغيير شكل الحرف أو إدخال‬
‫األرقام أو عالمات الترقيم‪ ،‬اضغط على زر ‪.SUBTITLE‬‬
‫خدمات الشبكة‬
‫‪٨ .٨‬وعندما تنتهي‪ ،‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال واختر ‪،OK‬‬
‫ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال مرة أخرى‪ .‬تظهر شاشة‬
‫مجددا‪.‬‬
‫‪Create Account‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬قم باختيار المعرف الخاص بك من القائمة التي‬
‫تظهر‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر شاشة‬
‫مجددا‪.‬‬
‫‪Create Account‬‬
‫ً‬
‫مجددا‪،‬‬
‫‪١١١١‬عندما تظهر شاشة ‪Create Account‬‬
‫ً‬
‫قم باختيار ‪ ،Create Account‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر شاشة ‪.Confirmation‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬استخدم لوحة المفاتيح وجهاز التحكم عن بعد‬
‫إلدخال كلمة المرور‪ .‬وعندما تنتهي‪ ،‬اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ ،‬واختر ‪ ،OK‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال مرة‬
‫أخرى‪.‬‬
‫‪٩ .٩‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Confirm password‬ثم اضغط على‬
‫زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠١٠‬كرر الخطوتين رقم ‪ 7‬و‪.8‬‬
‫‪١٢١٢‬قم باختيار ‪ ،OK‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر‬
‫نافذة ‪.Continue to Register Service‬‬
‫‪١٣١٣‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Go Register‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Password‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫تظهر شاشة إدخال ولوحة مفاتيح‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫‪١٤١٤‬تظهر نافذة ‪.Register Service Account‬‬
‫ƒ ƒإذا كان لديك حسابات قائمة مع أي من موفري‬
‫الخدمة المدرجين‪ ،‬فيمكنك أن تربط حساب‬
‫الموفر وكلمة مرور حساب الموفر مع حسابك في‬
‫‪ .Smart TV‬يسهل التسجيل الوصول إلى موقع‬
‫ويب الموفرين‪ .‬للتعرف على تعليمات التسجيل‪،‬‬
‫انتقل إلى الخطوة ‪ 2‬في ‪Account Management‬‬
‫تحت قائمة ‪.Settings‬‬
‫ƒ ƒإذا لم يكن لديك حسابات موفر قائمة أو كنت‬
‫ال ترغب في تسجيل الحسابات القائمة في‬
‫هذا الوقت‪ ،‬فقم باختيار ‪ ،OK‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫أيضا أن تترك النافذة تغلق بذاتها‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬يمكنك ً‬
‫بعد حوالي دقيقة‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪عليك أن تستخدم عنوان بريد إلكتروني كمعرف‪.‬‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪ ▪أنت لست بحاجة إلى حساب الستخدام ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫▪يمكنك تسجيل ما يصل إلى ‪ 10‬حسابات مستخدمين‪.‬‬
‫تسجيل الدخول إلى الحساب‬
‫لتسجيل الدخول إلى حساب ‪ ،Smart TV‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬أثناء عرض شاشة ‪ Smart Hub‬الرئيسية على‬
‫التلفاز‪ ،‬اضغط على الزر األحمر (‪ )A‬في وحدة‬
‫التحكم عن بعد‪ .‬تظهر شاشة ‪.Create Account‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬قم باختيار السهم ألسفل بجوار حقل ‪Smart TV‬‬
‫‪ ،ID‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫▪إذا كنت ترغب في أن يدخل ‪ Smart Hub‬كلمة المرور الخاصة‬
‫تلقائيا‪ ،‬فقم باختيار الخيار ‪Remember my Smart TV‬‬
‫بك‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ID and password‬بعد إدخال كلمة المرور‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال تظهر عالمة‪ .‬يقوم بعدها ‪ Smart Hub‬بإدخال كلمة‬
‫تلقائيا عندما تقوم باختيار أو إدخال المعرف الخاص بك‪.‬‬
‫المرور‬
‫ً‬
‫قائمة اإلعدادات ‪ -‬األزرق (‪)D‬‬
‫تعطي شاشة قائمة ‪ Settings‬إمكانية الوصول إلى‬
‫وظائف إدارة الحساب‪ ،‬وإعادة التعيين‪ ،‬والخصائص‪.‬‬
‫للوصول إلى قائمة ‪ ،Settings‬ثم اختيار عنصر قائمة‪ ،‬اتبع‬
‫هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األزرق (‪ )D‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على الزرين ▲▼ لتحديد عنصر قائمة‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫يتم توضيح الوظائف المتاحة في شاشة قائمة ‪Settings‬‬
‫أدناه‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪عنصر ‪ Service Manager‬المدرج في قائمة ‪ Settings‬غير‬
‫متاح بالنسبة ألجهزة مشغل ‪.Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫‪Account Management‬‬
‫تحتوي قائمة ‪ Account Management‬على الوظائف‬
‫التي تجعلك تسجل حسابات موفر الخدمة الخاصة‬
‫بك‪ ،‬وتغيير كلمة المرور في ‪ ،Smart Hub‬وحذف أو إلغاء‬
‫تنشيط حسابك في ‪.Smart TV‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة حساب خدمة التسجيل‪ ،‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬في قائمة ‪ ،Account Management‬قم باختيار‬
‫‪ ،Register Service Account‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة ‪.Register Service Account‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على الزرين ▲▼ الختيار موفر الخدمة الذي‬
‫ترغب في ربطه مع حساب ‪ Smart TV‬الخاص بك‪،‬‬
‫ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪إذا كان لديك حساب تطبيقات ‪ Samsung‬وكنت ترغب في‬
‫استخدام وظيفة تطبيقات ‪ Samsung‬في ‪،Smart Hub‬‬
‫فيجب أن تسجل حساب تطبيقات ‪ Samsung‬هنا‪ .‬انظر‬
‫الصفحات من ‪ ٥٦‬إلى ‪ ٥٨‬لمزيد من المعلومات‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على الزرين ▲▼ الختيار ‪ ،Register‬ثم‬
‫باستخدام جهاز التحكم عن بعد ولوحة المفاتيح‬
‫على الشاشة‪ ،‬أدخل معرف الموقع وكلمة المرور‪.‬‬
‫عندما تنتهي‪ ،‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪هذا هو المعرف وكلمة المرور التي تستخدمها عادة للدخول‬
‫على حسابك في هذا الموقع‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬إذا قمت بإدخال المعرف وكلمة المرور بشكل صحيح‪،‬‬
‫تظهر رسالة ‪.Registered Successfully‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬إذا ضغطت على ‪ ،OK‬فكرر الخطوات من ‪ 2‬حتى ‪4‬‬
‫للربط مع موفر خدمة آخر‪.‬‬
‫‪٦ .٦‬عندما تنتهي‪ ،‬اضغط على الزر ‪.RETURN‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Change Password‬ثم اضغط على‬
‫زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬أدخل كلمة المرور الحالية‪ .‬تظهر الشاشة التالية‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬في الشاشة التالية‪ ،‬أدخل كلمة مرور جديدة في‬
‫السطر األول‪ .‬أدخل كلمة المرور مرة أخرى في‬
‫السطر الثاني للتأكيد‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬تظهر شاشة رسالة ‪Changing Password‬‬
‫‪ .Complete‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال أو انتظر إلى أن‬
‫يتم إغالق الشاشة ‪ -‬حوالي ‪ 5‬ثوانٍ‪.‬‬
‫إزالة حسابات الخدمة‬
‫تلغي وظيفة إزالة حسابات الخدمة جميع حسابات‬
‫الخدمة المسجلة الحالية التي قمت بتسجيلها في‬
‫شاشة ‪.Register Service Account‬‬
‫إلغاء تنشيط الحساب‬
‫تستخدم وظيفة إلغاء تنشيط الحساب إللغاء نشاط‬
‫حساب ‪ Smart TV‬الخاص بك وحذفه هو وجميع إعدادات‬
‫تماما من ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫الحساب الخاصة بك‬
‫ً‬
‫إعادة التعيين‬
‫تقوم وظيفة إعادة التعيين بتهيئة جميع األدوات التي‬
‫تم تنزيلها‪ ،‬وتمسح جميع حسابات وإعدادات المستخدم‬
‫من المشغل‪ ،‬وتقوم بإعادة تعيين جميع إعدادات ‪Smart‬‬
‫‪ Hub‬على اإلعدادات االفتراضية للمصنع‪ .‬ثم تقوم بإعادة‬
‫تشغيل ‪ Smart Hub‬كما لو كان يبدأ للمرة األولى‪ .‬ومع‬
‫ذلك‪ ،‬يظل حسابك على خادم ‪ .Smart Hub‬للدخول إلى‬
‫حسابك‪ ،‬أدخل معرفك وكلمة مرورك في شاشة ‪Create‬‬
‫‪.Account‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة إعادة التعيين‪ ،‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬في قائمة ‪ ،Settings‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Reset‬ثم اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫تظهر شاشة ‪.Reset‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬أدخل كلمة المرور األمنية الخاصة بك‪ .‬وهي كلمة‬
‫المرور التي قمت بإدخالها إذا قمت بإعداد التقييم‬
‫األبوي في ‪ BD‬أو ‪( DVD‬انظر الصفحة ‪ .)٣٦‬وإن لم‬
‫تكن قد فعلت ذلك‪ ،‬فأدخل ‪.0000‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪ 07‬خدمات الشبكة‬
‫تسجيل حساب خدمة‬
‫إذا كانت لديك حسابات قائمة لدى أي من موفري الخدمة‬
‫المدرجين من جانب وظيفة حساب خدمة التسجيل‪،‬‬
‫فيمكنك أن تربط حساب موفر الخدمة وكلمة مرور‬
‫حساب موفر الخدمة مع حسابك في ‪ .Smart TV‬إذا قمت‬
‫بربط الحساب‪ ،‬فسوف تكون قادرًا على تسجيل الدخول‬
‫إلى الحساب من خالل ‪ Smart Hub‬بسهولة‪ ،‬بدون إدخال‬
‫اسم حسابك أو كلمة المرور‪.‬‬
‫تغيير كلمة المرور‬
‫تساعدك وظيفة تغيير كلمة المرور على تغيير كلمة مرور‬
‫‪ Smart Hub‬الخاصة بك‪ .‬ولتغيير كلمة المرور‪ ،‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫خدمات الشبكة‬
‫تلقائيا‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬بعد ثوا ٍن قليلة‪ ،‬تتم إعادة تعيين ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫ً‬
‫قد تظهر الشاشة بلون أسود‪ ،‬ثم يظهر ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫مرة أخرى‪ .‬بعد ثوا ٍن قليلة‪ ،‬تبدأ عملية إعادة التهيئة‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬الستكمال إعادة التهيئة‪ ،‬انتقل إلى الخطوة ‪ 4‬في‬
‫بدء ‪ Smart Hub‬للمرة األولى‪( .‬انظر صفحة ‪)٤٩‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪إذا نسيت كلمة المرور الخاصة بك‪ ،‬فاضغط على الزر إيقاف‬
‫) على اللوحة األمامية للمشغل لمدة تزيد عن ‪ 5‬ثوا ٍن‬
‫(‬
‫بدون إدخال قرص‪.‬‬
‫الخصائص‬
‫تسرد عناصر قائمة ‪ Properties‬ثالث وظائف تعرض‬
‫معلومات حول ‪:Smart Hub‬‬
‫التقاصيل‬
‫لسرد معلومات حول ‪ Smart Hub‬بما في ذلك رقم‬
‫اإلصدار‪ ،‬ورقم الخدمات المثبتة‪ ،‬واستخدام الذاكرة‪،‬‬
‫والمعرف الفريد للمنتج‪.‬‬
‫‪Check the speed of your internet connection‬‬
‫لتشغيل اختبار يوضح مدى سرعة االتصال بخادم‬
‫‪ Samsung‬بالميجا بت في الثانية (‪.)Mbps‬‬
‫السرعات األقل من ‪ 1,5‬ميجا بت في الثانية يمكن أن تحد‬
‫من استمتاعك بـ ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫‪Terms of Service Agreement‬‬
‫لعرض اتفاقية شروط الخدمة‪.‬‬
‫قائمة ‪ - Edit Mode‬أصفر (‪)C‬‬
‫تجعلك الوظائف الموجودة في قائمة ‪ Edit Mode‬تتحكم‬
‫في األدوات الموجودة في قسم تطبيقاتي في شاشة‬
‫‪ .Smart Hub‬باستخدام هذه الوظائف‪ ،‬بإمكانك أن تفتح‬
‫إمكانية الوصول أو تغلقها إلى بعض األدوات‪ ،‬أو مجلد‬
‫جديد‪ ،‬ونقل األدوات إليه‪ ،‬وإعادة تسمية المجلدات‪ ،‬وحذف‬
‫األدوات‪ ،‬وتغيير موضع األدوات على الشاشة‪.‬‬
‫للوصول إلى قائمة ‪ ،Edit Mode‬ثم قم باختيار عنصر‬
‫قائمة‪ ،‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم‬
‫عن بعد‪ .‬يظهر شريط قائمة ‪ Edit Mode‬أسفل‬
‫الشاشة‪.‬‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد عنصر قائمة‪،‬‬
‫ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫يتم توضيح الوظائف الموجودة في شريط قائمة ‪Edit‬‬
‫‪ Mode‬أدناه‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪بعض عناصر القائمة قد ال تظهر على الشاشة‪ .‬لمشاهدة‬
‫هذه العناصر‪ ،‬اضغط على الزرين ◄► لتحريك حافة‬
‫الشاشة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط مرة أخرى إلظهار العناصر‪.‬‬
‫▪بإمكانك أن تغلق الشريط من خالل تمييز ‪ X‬في الجانب‬
‫األيمن السفلي‪ ،‬ثم الضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫النقل‬
‫تمكنك وظيفة النقل من تغيير موضع أداة على الشاشة‪.‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة النقل‪ ،‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬قم باختيار األداة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر‬
‫عالمة اختيار على األداة‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد ‪ ،Move‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر أيقونة تغيير الموضع‬
‫على األداة‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬استخدم األزرار ▲▼►◄ لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط على‬
‫زر اإلدخال عندما تكون األيقونة في الموضع الذي‬
‫تريده‪ .‬تنتقل األداة إلى الموقع الجديد‪.‬‬
‫النقل إلى المجلد‬
‫تساعدك وظيفة النقل إلى المجلد في نقل أداة إلى‬
‫مجلد‪ .‬والستخدام وظيفة النقل إلى المجلد‪ ،‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬قم باختيار األداة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬إذا كنت‬
‫قد قمت بالفعل بإنشاء مجلد‪ ،‬فيمكن نقل األداة‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد ‪Move to‬‬
‫‪ ،Folder‬ثم اضغط على زراإلدخال‪ .‬يتم فتح نافذة‬
‫‪.Move to Folder‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد مجلد‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر رسالة ‪Moved to‬‬
‫‪ ،Folder‬ثم يتم إغالقها‪ .‬تم نقل األداة إلى المجلد‬
‫الجديد‪.‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬قم بإغالق قائمة ‪.Edit Mode‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬في ‪ ،My Applications‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄‬
‫لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال عندما تكون‬
‫الختيار مجلد‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬يتم فتح‬
‫المجلد‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬قم باختيار أداة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬يبدأ‬
‫التطبيق أو الخدمة المرتبط (المرتبطة) باألداة‪.‬‬
‫لتحرير العناصر في مجلد‬
‫قم باختيار مجلد‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬يتم فتح‬
‫المجلد‪.‬‬
‫اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن بعد‪.‬‬
‫تظهر أزرار التحرير أسفل الشاشة‪.‬‬
‫تعمل هذه األزرار بنفس طريقة أزرار قائمة ‪Edit Mode‬‬
‫على الشاشة الرئيسية‪ .‬على سبيل المثال‪ ،‬لنقل أداة إلى‬
‫الشاشة الرئيسية لـ ‪ My Applications‬مرة أخرى‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬قم باختيار األداة‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Move to Folder‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة ‪.Move to Folder‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬قم باختيار ‪ ،My Applications‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬يتم إغالق شاشة ‪ ،Move to Folder‬وتعود‬
‫األداة إلى شاشة ‪ My Applications‬الرئيسية‪.‬‬
‫مجلد جديد‬
‫تساعدك وظيفة المجلد الجديد في إنشاء وتسمية‬
‫المجلدات الجديدة‪ .‬بمجرد إنشائك لمجلد‪ ،‬بإمكانك أن‬
‫تنقل األدوات إليه‪ .‬الستخدام وظيفة المجلد الجديد‪ ،‬اتبع‬
‫هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال عندما تكون لنقل المؤشر إلى ‪New‬‬
‫‪ ،Folder‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة‬
‫‪ New Folder‬ولوحة مفاتيح‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬استخدم لوحة المفاتيح إلدخال اسم المجلد‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫يتم إغالق شاشة ‪ New Folder‬ويظهر المجلد‬
‫الجديد على شاشة ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
‫تساعدك وظيفة إعادة تسمية المجلد في إعادة تسمية‬
‫مجلداتك‪ .‬والستخدام وظيفة إعادة تسمية المجلد‪ ،‬اتبع‬
‫هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال عندما تكون لتحديد مجلد‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال عندما تكون لتحديد ‪Rename a‬‬
‫‪ ،Folder‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة‬
‫‪ Folder Rename‬ولوحة مفاتيح‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬استخدم لوحة المفاتيح إلدخال اسم جديد‪ ،‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬يتم إغالق نافذة ‪Rename‬‬
‫ويظهر االسم الجديد أسفل المجلد‪.‬‬
‫القفل‬
‫تساعدك وظيفة القفل على قفل بعض األدوات في ‪My‬‬
‫‪ Applications‬حتى ال يمكن فتحها بدون إدخال الرمز‬
‫األمني األبوي‪.‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة القفل‪ ،‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال عندما تكون لتحديد أداة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬إذا كان من الممكن أن يتم قفل‬
‫األداة‪ ،‬يتم تمكين عنصر القائمة ‪.Lock‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لنقل األيقونة‪ .‬اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال عندما تكون لتحديد ‪ ،Lock‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة ‪.Lock Service‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬أدخل الرمز األمني األبوي الخاص بك (انظر صفحة‬
‫‪ .)٣٦‬إذا لم تكن قد قمت بعمل رمز أمني أبوي‪ ،‬فأدخل‬
‫‪.0000‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة ‪Lock Service‬‬
‫لتأكيد القفل‪ ،‬ثم يتم إغالقها‪ .‬يظهر رمز قفل بجوار‬
‫األداة‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪ 07‬خدمات الشبكة‬
‫للوصول إلى األدوات في مجلد‬
‫إعادة تسمية المجلد‬
‫خدمات الشبكة‬
‫إلغاء القفل‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد أداة تم قفلها‪،‬‬
‫ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد ‪ ،Unlock‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة ‪.Lock Service‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬أدخل الرمز األمني األبوي الخاص بك (انظر صفحة‬
‫‪ .)٣٦‬إذا لم تكن قد قمت بعمل رمز أمني أبوي‪ ،‬فأدخل‬
‫‪.0000‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر نافذة ‪Lock Service‬‬
‫‪ Released‬لتأكيد تحرير القفل‪ ،‬ثم يتم إغالقها‪.‬‬
‫الحذف‬
‫تتيح لك وظيفة الحذف إمكانية حذف األدوات من ‪My‬‬
‫‪ .Applications‬الستخدام وظيفة الحذف‪ ،‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األصفر (‪ )C‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد أداة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط‬
‫على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد ‪ ،Delete‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر الرسالة “‪Do you‬‬
‫‪.”?)want to delete selected item(s‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬قم باختيار ‪ ،Yes‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ ..‬يتم‬
‫حذف األداة‪.‬‬
‫قائمة ‪ - Sort‬أخضر (‪)B‬‬
‫تساعدك الوظائف المتاحة في قائمة ‪ Sort‬في تصنيف‬
‫التطبيقات الموجودة في ‪ My Applications‬حسب االسم‬
‫والتاريخ وتكرار (االستخدام) والفئة‪ .‬إذا قمت بتغيير موضع‬
‫تلقائيا بتمييز ‪User Defined‬‬
‫أداة يدويًا‪ ،‬تقوم قائمة ‪Sort‬‬
‫ً‬
‫عند بدء تشغيل هذه األداة‪.‬‬
‫لتصنيف األدوات في ‪ ،My Applications‬اتبع هذه‬
‫الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزر األخضر (‪ )B‬في وحدة التحكم عن‬
‫بعد‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على الزرين ►◄ لتحديد أسلوب التصنيف‪،‬‬
‫ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬يصنف ‪Smart Hub‬‬
‫األدوات حسب األسلوب الذي قمت باختياره‪.‬‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫تساعدك ‪ Samsung Apps‬على تنزيل تطبيقات وخدمات‬
‫بمقابل ومجانًا على مشغل أقراص ‪ Blu-ray‬ومشاهدتها‬
‫أو استخدامها على التلفاز الخاص بك‪.‬‬
‫وتتضمن هذه التطبيقات والخدمات مقاطع الفيديو‬
‫والموسيقى والصور واأللعاب واألخبار والرياضة وما إلى‬
‫ذلك‪ .‬وتظهر أدوات التطبيقات الجديدة تظهر في ‪My‬‬
‫‪.Applications‬‬
‫تتم إضافة التطبيقات والخدمات اإلضافية بشكل دوري‪.‬‬
‫بالنسبة للتطبيقات المدفوعة‬
‫لتنزيل التطبيقات مدفوعة األجر‪ ،‬يجب إنشاء حساب‬
‫‪ Samsung Apps‬وإضافة رقم بطاقة ائتمان إلى‬
‫الحساب‪.‬‬
‫وإلنشاء حساب ‪ ،Samsung Apps‬يُرجى زيارة موقع‬
‫‪.www.samsung.com‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪هذه الخدمة قد ال تتوفر في بعض الدول‪.‬‬
‫الوصول إلى شاشة ‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫للوصول إلى ‪ ،Samsung Apps‬اضغط على األزرار‬
‫▲▼►◄ للتنقل إلى منطقة ‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫على شاشة ‪ Smart Hub‬الرئيسية‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر شاشة ‪.Samsung Apps‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪إذا كانت هذه هي المرة األولى التي تدخل فيها على هذه‬
‫الشاشة‪ ،‬تظهر شاشة شروط الخدمة‪ .‬إذا كنت ترغب في‬
‫الموافقة‪ ،‬فقم باختيار ‪ ،Agree‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على الزرين ►◄ لالنتقال إلى قائمة‬
‫التصنيف الموجودة على اليسار‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على الزر ▲▼ لتمييز فئة‪ .‬في ثوا ٍن قليلة‪،‬‬
‫تعرض شاشة ‪ Samsung Apps‬التطبيقات في هذه‬
‫الفئة‪ .‬تظهر عالمات تبويب ‪ Sort‬في األعلى‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على الزر ► لالنتقال إلى التطبيقات أو‬
‫الخدمات المعروضة‪.‬‬
‫‪٤ .٤‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد تطبيق أو‬
‫خدمة‪ ،‬ثم اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪ .‬تظهر شاشة‬
‫‪ Application Details‬لوصف الخدمة أو التطبيق‪.‬‬
‫‪٥ .٥‬قم بتحديد ‪ ،Download Now‬ثم اضغط على زر‬
‫اإلدخال‪ .‬إذا كان التطبيق أو الخدمة مجانية‪ ،‬يتم‬
‫تنزيلها وتشغيلها‪ .‬وإذا لم يكن التطبيق أو الخدمة‬
‫مجانية‪ ،‬وكانت هناك رسوم يجب دفعها‪ ،‬فاتبع‬
‫اإلرشادات التي تظهر على الشاشة إلكمال التنزيل‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪‬
‫▪بعض التطبيقات من الممكن تنزيلها مجانًا‪ ،‬ولكنها تتطلب‬
‫تسجيالً لدى موفر الخدمة أو وجود حساب مدفوع لدى موفر‬
‫الخدمة الستخدامها‪.‬‬
‫▪تظهر أدوات التطبيقات والخدمات التي قمت بتنزيلها من‬
‫‪ Samsung Apps‬في ‪.My Applications‬‬
‫عالمات تبويب ‪Sort By‬‬
‫يمكنك الوصول إلى عالمات تبويب ‪ Sort By‬أعلى‬
‫الشاشة باستخدام األزرار ▲▼►◄ ‪ .‬وكل عالمة تبويب‬
‫تعرض الخدمات أو التطبيقات بالفئة التي تختارها‪،‬‬
‫ويتم فرزها حسب المعايير الموجودة في عالمة التبويب‬
‫(موصى به‪ ،‬أكثر تنزيالً‪ ،‬األحدث‪ ،‬االسم)‪.‬‬
‫يمكنك كذلك استخدام الزر األزرق (‪ )D‬في زر على وحدة‬
‫التحكم عن بعد للوصول إلى عالمات تبويب ‪ .Sort By‬كل‬
‫مرة تضغط فيها على الزر األزرق (‪ )D‬يتم تغيير الشاشة‬
‫من عالمة تبويب فرز إلى عالمة التبويب التالية‪.‬‬
‫تتاح الفئات التالية‪:‬‬
‫ •‪ : ?What’s New‬لعرض التطبيقات المسجلة حدي ًثا‪.‬‬
‫ •‪ : Video‬لعرض مختلف وسائط الفيديو مثل األفالم‬
‫وبرامج التلفاز وأفالم الفيديو القصيرة‪.‬‬
‫ •‪ : Game‬لعرض مختلف األلعاب مثل سودوكو‬
‫والشطرنج‪.‬‬
‫ •‪ : Sports‬لعرض مختلف خدمات الوسائط الرياضية‬
‫مثل معلومات المباريات والصور وأفالم الفيديو‬
‫القصيرة‪.‬‬
‫ •‪ : Lifestyle‬يتضمن مختلف خدمات وسائط أسلوب‬
‫الحياة مثل الموسيقى وأدوات إدارة الصور الشخصية‪،‬‬
‫والشبكات االجتماعية مثل ‪ Facebook‬و‪Twitter‬‬
‫ •‪ : Information‬تتضمن خدمات المعلومات المختلفة‬
‫مثل األخبار والبورصة والنشرة الجوية‪.‬‬
‫ •‪ : Other‬يتضمن خدمات متنوعة أخرى‪.‬‬
‫‪My Account‬‬
‫يمنحك ‪ My Account‬إمكانية الوصول إلى تاريخ ترتيب‬
‫وتنزيل ‪ ،Samsung Apps‬وإلى شاشة ‪.My Apps Cash‬‬
‫والبد من أن يكون لديك حساب ‪ Samsung Apps‬للوصول‬
‫إلى هذه المعلومات‪.‬‬
‫‪Help‬‬
‫إذا كانت لديك استفسارات بشأن ‪،Samsung Apps‬‬
‫فاطلع على التعليمات أوالً‪ .‬إذا لم تنطبق أي من هذه‬
‫فيرجى زيارة الموقع ‪..www.samsung.com‬‬
‫اإلرشادات‪ُ ،‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة التعليمات‪ ،‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬اضغط على األزرار ▲▼►◄ لتحديد ‪ ،Help‬ثم‬
‫اضغط على زر اإلدخال‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬اضغط على▲▼ لتمرير نص التعليمات‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬اضغط على الزر ◄ للخروج من التعليمات‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪ 07‬خدمات الشبكة‬
‫استخدام شاشة ‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫الستخدام شاشة ‪ ،Samsung Apps‬اتبع هذه الخطوات‪:‬‬
‫‪ Samsung Apps‬حسب الفئة‬
‫خدمات الشبكة‬
‫استخدام األزرار الملونة على وحدة التحكم‬
‫عن بعد مع ‪Samsung Apps‬‬
‫ •أحمر (‪ : )Login) (A‬لتسجيل الدخول إلى حساب‬
‫‪.Smart TV‬‬
‫ •أخضر (‪( )B‬عرض الصور المصغرة ‪ /‬عرض القائمة)‬
‫‪ :‬لتغيير التطبيقات بين عرض الصور المصغرة وعرض‬
‫القائمة‪.‬‬
‫ •أزرق (‪ :Sort By) (D‬لفرز التطبيقات في فئة حسب‬
‫موصى به‪ ،‬أو األكثر تنزيال‪ ،‬أو األحدث‪ ،‬أو االسم‪.‬‬
‫ •‪ : Return‬للعودة إلى القائمة السابقة‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫▪قد تتم إضافة أو حذف خدمات محتويات اإلنترنت بدون إخطار‪.‬‬
‫بالنسبة لتعليمات وظيفة ملفات الفيديو أو‬
‫البحث‪ ،‬يُرجى زيارة الموقع ‪.www.samsung.com‬‬
‫™‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫بمجرد توصيل المشغل بالشبكة‪ ،‬يمكنك االستمتاع‬
‫بمحتويات خدمات متنوعة ذات صلة باألفالم باستخدام‬
‫القرص المتوافق مع ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬قم بتوصيل شريحة ذاكرة فالش ‪ USB‬في المقبس‬
‫الخاص بها على جانب المشغل‪ ،‬ثم قم بفحص‬
‫الذاكرة المتبقية بها‪ .‬يجب أن يحتوي جهاز الذاكرة‬
‫على ‪ 1‬جيجا بايت على األقل من المساحة الخالية‬
‫الستيعاب خدمات ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬أدخل قرص ‪ Blu-ray‬يدعم ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫‪٣ .٣‬حدد عنصرًا من محتويات خدمة ‪ BD-LIVE‬المتنوعة‬
‫المتوفرة من قبل مصنع القرص‪.‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫▪قد تختلف الطريقة التي تستخدم بها ‪ BD-LIVE‬والمحتويات‬
‫المتوفرة‪ ،‬وف ًقا لمصنع القرص‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫استخدام وظيفة ‪AllShare‬‬
‫تتيح لك وظيفة ‪ AllShare‬تشغيل ملفات الموسيقى‬
‫والفيديو والصور من جهاز الكمبيوتر الشخصي أو هاتفك‬
‫النقال المتوافق مع ‪ DLNA‬أو ‪ NAS‬على المشغل‪.‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة ‪ AllShare‬مع المشغل الخاص بك‪،‬‬
‫يجب توصيل المشغل بالشبكة (انظر الصفحتين من ‪٢٢‬‬
‫إلى ‪.)٢٣‬‬
‫الستخدام وظيفة ‪ AllShare‬مع الكمبيوتر الشخصي‬
‫الخاص بك‪ ،‬يجب عليك تثبيت برنامج ‪ AllShare‬على جهاز‬
‫الكمبيوتر‪.‬‬
‫إذا كان لديك هاتف نقال أو ‪ NAS‬متوافق مع ‪،DLNA‬‬
‫يصبح بإمكانك استخدام ‪ AllShare‬بدون أية برامج‬
‫إضافية‪.‬‬
‫ويمكنك تنزيل برامج الكمبيوتر والحصول على تعليمات‬
‫مفصلة عن استخدام ‪ AllShare‬من موقع ويب‬
‫‪.Samsung.com‬‬
‫الملحق‬
‫‪ 08‬الملحق‬
‫استكشاف األخطاء وإصالحها‬
‫قبل طلب الخدمة‪ ،‬يرجى التحقق مما يلي‪.‬‬
‫المشكلة‬
‫الحل‬
‫ال يمكن التشغيل باستخدام وحدة التحكم عن بعد‪• .‬افحص البطاريات املوجودة في وحدة التحكم عن بعد‪ .‬فقد يلزم استبدالها‪.‬‬
‫ •ال تقم بتشغيل وحدة التحكم عن بعد من مسافة أبعد من ‪ 6.1‬م‪.‬‬
‫ •قم بإزالة البطاريات واضغط مع االستمرار على زر واحد أو أكثر لعدة دقائق لتفريغ املعالج‬
‫الدقيق املوجود داخل وحدة التحكم عن بعد إلعادة ضبطه‪ .‬أعد تركيب البطاريات وحاول‬
‫تشغيل وحدة التحكم عن بعد مرة أخرى‪.‬‬
‫القرص ال يعمل‪.‬‬
‫ •تأكد من أن القرص مثبت بحيث يكون اجلانب الذي عليه امللصق ألعلى‪.‬‬
‫ •حتقق من رقم املنطقة اخلاص بقرص ‪.Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫قائمة ‪ Disc Menu‬ال تظهر‪.‬‬
‫ •تأكد من أن القرص يحتوي على قوائم أقراص‪.‬‬
‫تظهر رسالة الحظر على الشاشة‪.‬‬
‫ •تظهر هذه الرسالة عند الضغط على زر غير صالح‪.‬‬
‫ •برنامج األقراص ‪ Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬ال يدعم امليزة (على سبيل املثال‪ ،‬الزوايا)‪.‬‬
‫ •لقد طلبت عنوان أو رقم فصل أو وقت بحث خارج النطاق‪.‬‬
‫وضع التشغيل يختلف عن تحديد ‪.Setup Menu‬‬
‫ •بعض الوظائف احملددة في ‪ Setup Menu‬قد ال تعمل بشكل جيد إذا كان القرص غير‬
‫مشفر بالوظيفة املطابقة‪.‬‬
‫ال يمكن تغيير نسبة العرض إلى االرتفاع الخاصة‬
‫بالشاشة‪.‬‬
‫ •تكون نسبة العرض إلى االرتفاع اخلاصة بالشاشة ثابتة على قرص ‪Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬‬
‫اخلاص بك‪.‬‬
‫ •ال ميثل هذا األمر مشكلة باملشغل‪.‬‬
‫ال يوجد صوت‪.‬‬
‫ •تأكد من أنك قد قمت بتحديد ‪ Digital Output‬الصحيحة في قائمة ‪.Audio Options‬‬
‫الشاشة مغلقة‬
‫ •إذا كانت مخرجات ‪ HDMI‬مضبوطة على درجة دقة ال يدعمها جهاز التلفاز اخلاص بك‬
‫(على سبيل املثال‪ ،)1080p ،‬فقد ال ميكنك رؤية الصورة على التلفاز‪.‬‬
‫) (على اللوحة األمامية) ألكثر من ‪ 5‬ثوا ٍن بدون وجود قرص‬
‫ •اضغط على الزر ‪( STOP‬‬
‫بالداخل‪ .‬تعود جميع اإلعدادات إلى إعدادات املصنع‪.‬‬
‫ •عند استعادة إعدادات املصنع االفتراضية‪ ،‬يتم حذف جميع بيانات ‪ BD‬المخزنة والخاصة‬
‫بالمستخدم‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫الملحق‬
‫المشكلة‬
‫الحل‬
‫نسيت كلمة المرور‬
‫) (على اللوحة األمامية) ألكثر من ‪ 5‬ثوا ٍن بدون وجود قرص‬
‫ •اضغط على الزر ‪( STOP‬‬
‫بالداخل‪ .‬تعود جميع اإلعدادات مبا فيها كلمة املرور إلى إعدادات املصنع‪.‬‬
‫ال تستخدم ذلك إال إذا كان ذلك أمرًا ضروريًا للغاية‪.‬‬
‫ •عند استعادة إعدادات املصنع االفتراضية‪ ،‬يتم حذف جميع بيانات ‪ BD‬المخزنة والخاصة‬
‫بالمستخدم‪.‬‬
‫إذا عانيت من مشكالت أخرى‪.‬‬
‫ •انتقل إلى احملتويات واعثر على القسم الذي يحتوي على توضيحات بشأن املشكلة احلالية‬
‫في دليل املستخدم واتبع اإلجراءات مرة أخرى‪.‬‬
‫ •إذا ظلت املشكلة قائمة وال ميكن حلها‪ ،‬فيرجى االتصال بأقرب مركز خدمة معتمد‬
‫لشركة ‪.Samsung‬‬
‫الصورة غير صافية أو مشوهة‬
‫مخدوشا‪.‬‬
‫ •تأكد من أن القرص نظيف وليس‬
‫ً‬
‫ •قم بتنظيف القرص‪.‬‬
‫ال توجد مخرجات ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ •حتقق من االتصال بني التلفاز ومقبس ‪ HDMI‬في املشغل‪.‬‬
‫ •حتقق من أن جهاز التلفاز اخلاص بك يدعم درجة دقة مدخالت ‪ 576p/480p HDMI‬و‪720p‬‬
‫و‪ 1080i‬و‪.1080p‬‬
‫شاشة مخرجات ‪ HDMI‬غير طبيعية‪.‬‬
‫ •إذا ظهرت ضوضاء عشوائية على الشاشة‪ ،‬فهذا يعني أن التلفاز ال يدعم حماية ‪HDCP‬‬
‫(حماية احملتويات الرقمية ذات النطاق العريض العالي)‬
‫يمكنني رؤية المجلدات المشتركة من خالل‬
‫‪ ،AllShare‬ولكن ال يمكنني رؤية الملفات‪.‬‬
‫ •يعرض ‪ AllShare‬امللفات املطابقة لفئات الصورة واملوسيقى واألفالم فقط‪ .‬وقد ال يتم‬
‫عرض امللفات التي ال تتطابق مع هذه الفئات‪.‬‬
‫يتم عرض الفيديو بشكل متقطع‪.‬‬
‫ •حتقق من استقرار الشبكة‪.‬‬
‫زائدا‪.‬‬
‫ليس‬
‫الشبكة‬
‫حمل‬
‫وأن‬
‫ا‬
‫جيد‬
‫موصل‬
‫ •حتقق من أن كابل الشبكة‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ •االتصال الالسلكي بني اجلهاز املتوافق مع ‪ DLNA‬واملشغل غير ثابت‪.‬‬
‫حتقق من االتصال‪.‬‬
‫وظيفة ‪AllShare‬‬
‫اتصال ‪ AllShare‬بين التلفاز والكمبيوتر غير مستقر‪• .‬حتقق من استقرار الشبكة‪.‬‬
‫زائدا‪.‬‬
‫جيدا وأن حمل الشبكة ليس ً‬
‫ •حتقق من أن كابل الشبكة موصل ً‬
‫ •االتصال الالسلكي بني اجلهاز املتوافق مع ‪ DLNA‬واملشغل غير ثابت‪.‬‬
‫حتقق من االتصال‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫ال يمكنني االتصال بخادم ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ •حتقق هل جنح اتصال الشبكة أم ال عن طريق استخدام قائمة ‪( .Network Status‬انظر‬
‫صفحة ‪)٣٤‬‬
‫ •حتقق هل مت توصيل جهاز ذاكرة ‪ USB‬باملشغل أم ال‪.‬‬
‫ • يجب أن يحتوي جهاز الذاكرة على ‪ 1‬جيجا بايت على األقل من املساحة اخلالية الستيعاب‬
‫خدمات ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ميكنك التحقق من احلجم املتوفر في إدارة بيانات ‪( .BD‬انظر صفحة ‪)٣٥‬‬
‫ •يرجى التحقق من إعداد قائمة ‪ BD-LIVE Internet Connection‬على ‪.)Allow (All‬‬
‫ •إذا فشلت جميع اإلجراءات السابقة‪ ،‬فاتصل مبوفر احملتويات أو قم بتحديث املشغل بأحدث‬
‫البرامج الثابتة‪.‬‬
‫عند استخدام خدمة ‪ ،BD-LIVE‬يحدث خطأ‪.‬‬
‫ • يجب أن يحتوي جهاز الذاكرة على ‪ 1‬جيجا بايت على األقل من املساحة اخلالية الستيعاب‬
‫خدمات ‪.BD-LIVE‬‬
‫ميكنك التحقق من احلجم املتوفر في إدارة بيانات ‪( .BD‬انظر صفحة ‪)٣٥‬‬
‫✎ ✎مالحظة‬
‫▪ ▪عند استعادة إعدادات المصنع االفتراضية‪ ،‬يتم حذف جميع بيانات ‪ BD‬المخزنة والخاصة بالمستخدم‪.‬‬
‫اإلصالحات‬
‫إذا اتصلت بنا إلصالح المشغل‪ ،‬يمكن تقاضي رسوم إدارية في أي من الحالتين التاليتين‪:‬‬
‫بناء على طلبك وليس هناك عيب في المنتج‪.‬‬
‫‪١ .١‬يتم استدعاء مهندس إلى بيتك ً‬
‫‪٢ .٢‬تحضر الوحدة إلى مركز اإلصالح وال يكون هناك عيب في المنتج‪.‬‬
‫سوف نبلغك بمبلغ الرسوم اإلدارية قبل أن نجري زيارة منزلية أو أن نبدأ أي عمل على المشغل الخاص بك‪.‬‬
‫ونحن نوصيك أن تقرأ هذا الدليل بالكامل‪ ،‬وأن تبحث عن حل على اإلنترنت في موقع ‪ ،www.samsung.com‬أو االتصال‬
‫بخدمة عمالء ‪ Samsung‬قبل السعي إلصالح المشغل الخاص بك‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪ 08‬الملحق‬
‫المشكلة‬
‫‪BD-LIVE‬‬
‫الحل‬
‫الملحق‬
‫المواصفات‬
‫الوزن‬
‫عام‬
‫األبعاد‬
‫مدى درجة حرارة التشغيل‬
‫مدى درجة الرطوبة للتشغيل‬
‫)‪BD (Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫‪( DVD‬القرص المتنوع الرقمي)‬
‫األقراص‬
‫القرص المدمج‪ 12 :‬سم‬
‫(القرص المدمج)‬
‫القرص المدمج‪ 8 :‬سم‬
‫(القرص المدمج)‬
‫مخرجات الفيديو‬
‫الفيديو المركب‬
‫الفيديو ‪ /‬الصوت‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫قناتان‬
‫يمقرلا توصلا تاجرخم‬
‫مخرجات الصوت‬
‫*استجابة التردد‬
‫*معد ل‪S/N‬‬
‫*المدى الديناميكي‬
‫‪ +5‬درجات مئوية إلى ‪ +35‬درجة مئوية‬
‫‪ 10%‬إلى ‪75%‬‬
‫سرعة القراءة‪ 9.834 :‬م‪/‬ثانية‬
‫سرعة القراءة‪ 6.98 :‬إلى ‪ 7.68‬م‪/‬ثانية‬
‫وقت التشغيل التقريبي (قرص بجانب واحد‪ ،‬قرص بطبقة واحدة)‪ 135 :‬دقيقة‬
‫سرعة القراءة‪ 4.8 :‬إلى ‪ 5.6‬م‪/‬ثانية‬
‫أقصى وقت للتشغيل‪ 74 :‬دقيقة‬
‫سرعة القراءة‪ 4.8 :‬إلى ‪ 5.6‬م‪/‬ثانية‬
‫أقصى وقت للتشغيل‪ 20 :‬دقيقة‬
‫‪ 1‬قناة‪ 1.0 :‬فولت من الذروة إلى الذروة (حمل ‪ 75‬أوم)‬
‫قرص ‪Blu-ray/DVD : 576i/480i‬‬
‫‪1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p‬‬
‫صوت ‪ PCM‬متعدد القنوات‪ ،‬صوت تدفق البت‬
‫)‪L(1/L)، R(2/R‬‬
‫بصري‬
‫‪ 48‬كيلو هرتز العينة ‪ 4 :‬هرتز إلى ‪ 22‬كيلو هرتز‬
‫‪ 96‬كيلو هرتز العينة ‪ 4 :‬هرتز إلى ‪ 44‬كيلو هرتز‬
‫‪ 110‬ديسيبل‬
‫‪ 100‬ديسيبل‬
‫*إجمالي التشويه التوافقي‬
‫‪0.003%‬‬
‫شبكة محلية السلكية‬
‫تكون مدعومة عندما يكون محول الشبكة المحلية الالسلكي من إنتاج‬
‫شركة ‪ Samsung‬متصالً‪( .‬اسم الطراز‪)WIS09ABGN :‬‬
‫شبكة اإليثرنت‬
‫الشبكة‬
‫‪ 1.7‬كجم‬
‫(العرض) ‪( × 433‬العمق) ‪( × 205‬االرتفاع) ‪ 43‬مم‬
‫األمان‬
‫‪)WPS(PBC‬‬
‫طرف ‪10/100BASE-TX‬‬
‫‪)WEP (OPEN/SHARED‬‬
‫‪)WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES‬‬
‫‪)WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES‬‬
‫مدعوم‬
‫*‪ :‬المواصفات االسمية‬
‫‪- -‬التصميم والمواصفات عرضة للتغيير دون سابق إشعار‪.‬‬
‫ ‪-‬بالنسبة إلمداد واستهالك الطاقة‪ ،‬ارجع إلى الملصق الموجود على المنتج‪.‬‬‫‪- -‬الوزن واألبعاد قيم تقريبية‪.‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫طبقا للقيود المحددة أدناه وتلك التي ذكرت في هذا الدليل‪ ،‬بما في ذلك نوع القرص وقسم الخصائص في دليل‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫المستخدم هذا‪ ،‬فإن أنواع األقراص التي يمكن تشغيلها هي‪ :‬األقراص التجارية مسبقة التسجيل ‪ BD-ROM‬وأقراص‬
‫‪ DVD-VIDEO‬واألقراص المدمجة الصوتية ‪)Audio CD (CD-DA‬؛ و‪ ،BD-RE/-R‬و‪ ،DVD-RW/-R‬و‪.CD-RW/-R‬‬
‫ •* األقراص بخالف ما سبق ال يمكن تشغيلها على هذا المشغل‪ .‬وبعض األقراص أعاله قد ال تعمل نظرًا لسبب أو أكثر‬
‫مما هو مذكور أدناه‪.‬‬
‫ •ال يمكن لشركة ‪ Samsung‬أن تضمن أن هذا المشغل يمكنه تشغيل كل قرص يحمل الشعارات ‪ BD-ROM‬و‪BD-‬‬
‫‪ RE/-R‬و‪ DVD-VIDEO‬و‪ DVD-RW/-R‬و‪ DVD+RW/+ R‬و‪ ،CD-RW/-R‬وقد ال يستجيب هذا المشغل لجميع أوامر‬
‫التشغيل أو أن يشغل جميع الخصائص التي يتميز بها كل قرص‪ .‬هذه المشكالت الخاصة بتوافق األقراص وتشغيل‬
‫المشغل واردة مع أقراص التنسيقات الجديدة والحالية بسبب‪:‬‬
‫ ‪ Blu-ray-‬هو تنسيق جديد ومتطور وقد ال يشغل هذا المشغل جميع خصائص أقراص ‪ Blu-ray‬ألن بعض الخصائص‬‫قد تكون اختيارية‪ ،‬وقد تتم إضافة خصائص إضافية إلى تنسيق أقراص ‪ Blu-ray‬بعد إنتاج هذا المشغل وقد تكون‬
‫بعض الخصائص المتاحة عرضة لتأخر اإلتاحة‪.‬‬
‫‪- -‬ليست جميع إصدارات تنسيقات األقراص الجديدة والحالية مدعومة من قبل هذا المشغل‪،‬‬
‫‪- -‬قد تتم مراجعة تنسيقات األقراص الجديدة والحالية و‪/‬أو تغييرها‪ ،‬و‪/‬أو تحديثها‪ ،‬و‪/‬أو تكميلها‪،‬‬
‫‪- -‬يتم إنتاج بعض األقراص بطريقة تسمح بتشغيل وخصائص معينة أو محدودة أثناء التشغيل‪.‬‬
‫ ‪-‬بعض الخصائص قد تكون اختيارية‪ ،‬وقد تتم إضافة بعضها بعد إنتاج هذا المشغل أو قد تكون بعض الخصائص‬‫المتاحة عرضة لتأخر اإلتاحة‪،‬‬
‫ ‪-‬بعض األقراص التي تحمل الشعارات ‪ BD-ROM‬و‪ BD-RE/-R‬و‪ DVD-VIDEO‬و‪ DVD-RW/-R‬و‪ DVD+RW/+ R‬و‬‫‪ CD-RW/-R‬قد تكون على الرغم من ذلك تتسم بأنها أقراص غير قياسية‪،‬‬
‫ ‪-‬قد ال يتم تشغيل بعض األقراص نظرًا لحالتها الفيزيائية أو بسبب ظروف التسجيل‪،‬‬‫‪- -‬يمكن وقوع المشكالت واألخطاء أثناء عمل أقراص ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬و‪/‬أو ‪ DVD‬و‪/‬أو أثناء تصنيع األقراص‪،‬‬
‫‪- -‬يعمل هذا المنتج بشكل مختلف عن منتج ‪ DVD‬القياسي أو عن أجهزة الصوت والفيديو األخرى‪ ،‬و‪/‬أو‬
‫ ‪-‬من أجل األسباب التي ذكرت خالل هذا الدليل وألسباب أخرى اكتشفها ونشرها مركز رعاية عمالء شركة‬‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬
‫ •إذا حدثت معك مشكالت في توافق األقراص أو في تشغيل المشغل‪ ،‬فيرجى االتصال بمركز رعاية عمالء شركة‬
‫‪.SAMSUNG‬‬
‫أيضا االتصال بمركز رعاية عمالء شركة ‪ SAMSUNG‬للحصول على تحديثات هذا المشغل المتاحة‪.‬‬
‫يمكنك ً‬
‫ •للحصول على المزيد من المعلومات حول قيود التشغيل وتوافق األقراص‪ ،‬ارجع إلى أقسام التحذيرات‪ ،‬وقبل قراءة دليل‬
‫المستخدم‪ ،‬وأنواع األقراص‪ ،‬والخصائص‪ ،‬وقبل التشغيل في دليل المستخدم هذا‪.‬‬
‫حماية حقوق الطبع‬
‫ •ألنه تم اعتماد نظام ‪( AACS‬نظام الوصول إلى المحتويات المتقدم) كنظام لحماية المحتويات لتنسيق أقراص‬
‫‪ ،Blu-ray‬وهو ما يشابه استخدام نظام ‪( CSS‬نظام تشفير المحتويات) لتنسيق ‪ ،DVD‬تم فرض بعض القيود على‬
‫التشغيل ومخرجات اإلشارة التناظرية وما إلى ذلك فيما يتعلق بالمحتويات المحفوظة بنظام الوصول إلى المحتويات‬
‫المتقدم (‪.)AACS‬‬
‫قد يختلف تشغيل هذا المنتج والقيود المفروضة عليه بحسب وقت شرائك له حيث يمكن أن يتم تبني هذه القيود‬
‫و‪/‬أو تغييرها من قبل ‪ AACS‬بعد إنتاج هذا المنتج‪ .‬باإلضافة إلى ذلك‪ ،‬فإن استخدام عالمة ‪ BD-ROM‬و‪+BD‬‬
‫قيودا معينة‪ ،‬بما في ذلك القيود على‬
‫بشكل إضافي كنظام لحماية المحتويات لتنسيق أقراص ‪ ،Blu-ray‬مما يفرض‬
‫ً‬
‫التشغيل لمحتويات عالمة ‪ BD-ROM‬و‪/‬أو ‪ +BD‬المحمية‪ .‬للحصول على معلومات إضافية حول نظام ‪ AACS‬أو‬
‫عالمة ‪ BD-ROM‬أو ‪ +BD‬أو هذا المنتج‪ ،‬يرجى االتصال بمركز رعاية عمالء شركة ‪.SAMSUNG‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪ 08‬الملحق‬
‫إشعار االلتزام والتوافق‬
‫ليست جميع األقراص متوافقة‬
‫الملحق‬
‫ •يتم تشفير العديد من أقراص ‪ Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬مع تزويدها بحماية حقوق الطبع‪ .‬وبسبب ذلك‪ ،‬يجب عليك توصيل‬
‫المشغل الخاص بك مباشر ًة بجهاز التلفاز‪ ،‬وليس بجهاز الفيديو‪ .‬وينتج عن التوصيل بجهاز الفيديو الحصول على صور‬
‫مشوهة من أقراص ‪ Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬المحمية بحقوق الطبع‪.‬‬
‫ •هذا المنتج يحتوي على تقنية حماية حقوق الطبع والمحمية من قبل براءات االختراع األمريكية وحقوق الملكية‬
‫الفكرية األخرى الخاصة بشركة ‪ .Rovi Corporation‬يحظر إجراء الهندسة العكسية وتفكيك هذا المنتج‪.‬‬
‫وفقا لقوانين حماية حقوق الطبع األمريكية وقوانين البالد األخرى‪ ،‬قد تكون عرضة للمسئولية المدنية و‪/‬أو الجنائية‬
‫• ً‬
‫بسبب التسجيل أو االستخدام أو العرض أو التوزيع أو مراجعة برامج التلفاز وشرائط الفيديو وأقراص ‪ Blu-ray‬و ‪DVD‬‬
‫والمواد األخرى بشكل غير مرخص‪.‬‬
‫ •بالنسبة لمخرجات المسح التقدمي لمشغل أقراص ‪ :Blu-ray Disc‬يجب على المستهلكين مالحظة أنه‬
‫ليست جميع أجهزة التلفاز عالية التعريف تتوافق بشكل تام مع هذا المنتج وقد تتسبب في ظهور عيوب في الصورة‪.‬‬
‫في حالة حدوث مشكالت في صورة المسح التقدمي‪ ،‬يوصى بأن يقوم المستخدم بتحويل االتصال إلى مخرجات‬
‫التعريف القياسي‪ .‬إذا كانت هناك أسئلة بشأن توافق جهاز التلفاز الخاص بنا مع هذا المنتج‪ ،‬فيرجى االتصال بمركز‬
‫رعاية العمالء التابع للشركة‪.‬‬
‫إخالء مسئولية خدمة الشبكة‬
‫كل المحتويات والخدمات التي يمكن الوصول إليها من خالل هذا الجهاز تخص الغير وهي محمية بقوانين حقوق الطبع‬
‫والنشر و‪/‬أو براءات االختراع و‪/‬أو العالمات التجارية و‪/‬أو قوانين الملكية الفكرية األخرى‪ .‬هذه المحتويات والخدمات يتم‬
‫توفيرها فقط الستخدامكم الشخصي غير التجاري‪ .‬ال يجوز استخدام أي محتوى أو خدمات بطريقة ال يجيزها مالك‬
‫المحتوى أو موفر الخدمة‪ .‬ومع عدم تقييد ما سلف‪ ،‬ما لم يكن مالك المحتوى أو مقدم الخدمة يجيز ذلك بشكل‬
‫صريح‪ ،‬ال يجوز لكم تعديل أو نسخ أو إعادة نشر أو تحميل أو إرسال أو ترجمة أو بيع أو إنشاء أعمال مشتقة أو استغالل أو‬
‫توزيع أي محتوى أو خدمات معروضة من خالل هذا الجهاز بأية طريقة أو وسيطة‪.‬‬
‫يتم توفير محتوى وخدمات الغير "كما هي"‪ .‬ال تضمن ‪ SAMSUNG‬هذا المحتوى أو الخدمات المقدمة على هذا النحو‪،‬‬
‫سواء بشكل صريح أو ضمني‪ ،‬ألي غرض‪ .‬وتخلي شركة ‪ SAMSUNG‬مسئوليتها صراحة عن أية ضمانات ضمنية‪ ،‬بما‬
‫في ذلك على سبيل المثال ال الحصر‪ ،‬ضمانات التسويق التجاري أو المالئمة لغرض معين‪ .‬ال تضمن شركة ‪SAMSUNG‬‬
‫الدقة والصحة والمالءمة والمشروعية أو الكمال أي محتوى أو خدمات تتاح من خالل هذا الجهاز‪ ،‬وتحت أي ظرف من‬
‫الظروف‪ ،‬بما في ذلك اإلهمال‪ ،‬لن تكون شركة ‪ SAMSUNG‬مسئولة‪ ،‬سواء نتيجة التعاقد أو الضرر‪ ،‬عن أي أضرار مباشرة‬
‫أو غير مباشرة أو عارضة أو خاصة أو تبعية‪ ،‬أو أتعاب المحاماة‪ ،‬أو النفقات‪ ،‬أو أية أضرار أخرى ناشئة عن أو تتعلق بأية‬
‫معلومات واردة أو ناتجة عن استخدام أي محتوى أو خدمة من جانبك أو من جانب الغير‪ ،‬حتى لو تم اإلخطار بإمكانية وجود‬
‫هذه األضرار‪.‬‬
‫يجوز إنهاء خدمات الغير أو وقفها في أي وقت‪ ،‬وال تقدم ‪ Samsung‬أي تمثيل أو ضمان أن أية خدمات أو محتويات تظل‬
‫سارية ألية فترة من الوقت‪ .‬يتم إرسال المحتوى والخدمات بواسطة الغير بواسطة الشبكات ووسائل البث التي ال‬
‫تتحكم فيها شركة ‪ .Samsung‬مع عدم التقيد بعمومية إخالء المسئولية هذا‪ ،‬تخلي شركة ‪ Samsung‬مسئوليتها‬
‫صراحة عن أي إعاقة أو إيقاف ألي محتوى أو خدمات تتاح من خالل هذا الجهاز‪.‬‬
‫شركة ‪ Samsung‬ليست مسئولة عن خدمة العمالء فيما يتعلق بالمحتوى والخدمات‪ .‬أي استفسار أو طلب يتعلق‬
‫بالخدمات الخاصة بالمحتوى أو الخدمات البد من تقديمه بشكل مباشر للمحتوى المعني وموفري الخدمة‪.‬‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪ 08‬الملحق‬
‫الترخيص‬
‫ •تم التصنيع بموجب ترخيص من شركة ‪ .Dolby Laboratories‬تعد ‪ Dolby‬ورمز ‪ D‬المزدوج عالمتان‬
‫تجاريتان مملوكتان لشركة ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫ •تم تصنيع هذا الجهاز بموجب ترخيص حسب براءات االختراع األمريكية التالية‪;5,451,942 :‬‬
‫‪ 7,272,567 6,487,535 ;5,978,762 ;5,974,380 ;5,956,674‬وبراءات االختراع األمريكية والعالمية‬
‫األخرى التي تم إصدارها أو المعلقة‪ DTS .‬والرمز الخاص بها عالمتان تجاريتان مسجلتان‪ ،‬وشعارات‬
‫‪ DTS 2.0+ Digital Out‬و ‪ DTS‬هي عالمات تجارية خاصة بشركة ‪ .DTS, Inc‬ويشتمل المنتج على‬
‫البرامج‪ .‬حقوق الطبع والنشر © محفوظة لشركة ‪ ،DTS, Inc‬جميع الحقوق محفوظة‪.‬‬
‫‪2.0+Digital Out‬‬
‫ •‪DivX‬‬
‫ ‪-‬نبذة عن ‪ :DIVX VIDEO‬يعد ‪®DivX‬‬‫رقميا قامت شركة ‪ .DivX, Inc‬بإنشائه‪.‬‬
‫فيديو‬
‫تنسيق‬
‫ً‬
‫معتمدا من ‪ ®DivX Certified‬ويقوم بتشغيل الفيديو بتنسيق‬
‫رسميا‬
‫شغل جهازًا‬
‫الم ّ‬
‫ً‬
‫ويعد هذا ُ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪.DivX‬‬
‫قم بزيارة الموقع اإللكتروني ‪ www.divx.com‬لمزيد من المعلومات وأدوات البرامج لتحويل ملفاتك إلى فيديو ‪.DivX‬‬
‫ ‪-‬نبذة عن ‪ :DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND‬هذا الجهاز المرخص به من قبل ‪ ®DivX Certified‬يجب تسجيله لتشغيل‬‫محتويات ‪ )DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD‬التي يتم شراؤها‪ .‬للحصول على رمز التسجيل‪ ،‬حدد قسم ‪DivX VOD‬‬
‫في قائمة إعداد الجهاز‪ .‬اذهب إلى ‪ vod.divx.com‬لمزيد من المعلومات حول طريقة استكمال تسجيلك‪.‬‬
‫ ‪-‬هذا الجهاز مرخص به من قبل ‪ ®DivX Certified‬لتشغيل فيديو ®‪ DivX‬بدقة حتى ‪ ،HD 1080p‬بما في ذلك‬‫المحتويات المميزة‪.‬‬
‫ ‪-‬تعد ‪ ®DivX‬و‪ ®DivX Certified‬والشعارات المتصلة بها عالمات تجارية مسجلة خاصة بشركة ‪ .DivX, Inc‬وتستعمل‬‫بموجب ترخيص‪.‬‬
‫ ‪-‬وهذا المنتج يخضع لواحد أو أكثر من براءات االختراع األمريكية التالية‪;7,515,710 ;7,460,668 ;7,295,673 :‬‬‫‪.7,519,274‬‬
‫ ‪The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks‬‬
‫‪or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.‬‬
‫ •تعتبر ‪ Oracle‬و‪ Java‬عالمتان تجاريتان مسجلتان لشركة ‪ Oracle‬و‪/‬أو الشركات التابعة لها‪ .‬وثمة‬
‫أسماء أخرى قد تكون عالمات تجارية لمالكيها‪.‬‬
‫ •هذا الترخيص محدود لالستخدام الخاص غير التجاري من قبل مستهلكي المستخدم النهائيين للمحتويات‬
‫المرخصة‪ .‬وال يتم منح أي حقوق لالستخدام التجاري‪ .‬ال يغطي الترخيص أية وحدة منتج غير هذا المنتج‪ ،‬وال يشمل‬
‫الترخيص أي منتج غير مرخص أو عملية غير مرخصة بما يتفق مع ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬أو ‪ISO/IEC 13818-3‬‬
‫المستخدمة أو المباعة مع وحدة المنتج هذه‪.‬‬
‫يغطي الترخيص فقط استخدام وحدة هذا المنتج لتشفير و‪/‬أو فك تشفير ملفات الصوت التي تتفق مع ‪ISO/IEC‬‬
‫‪ 11172-3‬أو ‪ .ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ال يتم منح أي حقوق بموجب هذا الترخيص لسمات أو وظائف المنتج التي ال تتفق‬
‫مع ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬أو ‪.ISO/IEC 13818-3‬‬
‫ •إشعار ترخيص المصدر المفتوح‬
‫‪- -‬في حالة استخدام برامج المصدر المفتوح‪ ،‬تكون تراخيص المصدر المفتوح متاحة في قائمة المنتج‪.‬‬
‫ •تعتبر عالمات ‪ ™Blu-ray Disc‬و‪ ™Blu-ray‬والشعارات الخاصة بها عالمات تجارية تخص شركة ‪Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫‪.Association‬‬
‫ •هذا المنتج يحتوي على تقنية حماية حقوق الطبع والمحمية من قبل براءات االختراع األمريكية وحقوق الملكية‬
‫الفكرية األخرى الخاصة بشركة ‪ .Rovi Corporation‬يحظر إجراء الهندسة العكسية وتفكيك هذا المنتج‪.‬‬
‫العربية‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ في كافة أنحاء العالم‬SAMSUNG ‫بشركة‬
Area
Serbia
Slovakia
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
U.K
Eire
Lithuania
Latvia
Estonia
` CIS
Russia
Georgia
Armenia
Azerbaijan
‫ فيجرى االتصال بمركز خدمة العمالء الخاص بشركة‬،Samsung ‫إذا كان لديك أي استفسار أو تعليق على منتجات‬
.SAMSUNG
Contact Centre 
0700 Samsung (0700 726
7864)
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
902-1-SAMSUNG (902 172 678)
0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG)
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
0330 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717100
8-800-77777
8000-7267
800-7267
Uzbekistan
Kyrgyzstan
Tadjikistan
8-800-555-55-55
8-800-555-555
0-800-05-555
088-55-55-555
8-10-800-500-55-500
(GSM: 7799)
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
Ukraine
0-800-502-000
Belarus
Moldova
810-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
Australia
New Zealand
China
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858 / 010-6475 1880
Hong Kong
(852) 3698 4698
Kazakhstan
` Asia Pacific
Web Site
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com/
ch_fr/(French)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/
ua_ru
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/
hk_en/
Singapore
Thailand
Taiwan
Vietnam
3030 8282 / 1800 110011 /
1800 3000 8282 / 1800 266 8282
0800-112-8888 / 021-56997777
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864) /
1-800-3-SAMSUNG(726-7864) /
1-800-8-SAMSUNG(726-7864) /
02-5805777
1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1800-29-3232 / 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
Bahrain
Egypt
Jordan
Morocco
Oman
Saudi Arabia
Turkey
U.A.E
8000-4726
08000-726786
800-22273
080 100 2255
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
9200-21230
444 77 11
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Nigeria
South Africa
0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
0860-SAMSUNG (726-7864 )
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
Philippines
` Middle East
` Africa
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Area
` North America
Contact Centre 
Web Site
Canada
Mexico
U.S.A
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
Argentine
Brazil
Chile
Colombia
Costa Rica
Dominica
Ecuador
El Salvador
Guatemala
Honduras
Jamaica
Nicaragua
Panama
Peru
Puerto Rico
Trinidad &
Tobago
Venezuela
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421 / 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
01-8000112112
0-800-507-7267
1-800-751-2676
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
800-7919267
1-800-234-7267
00-1800-5077267
800-7267
0-800-777-08
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
0-800-100-5303
www.samsung.com
Albania
42 27 5755
0810 - SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
-
` Latin America
` Europe
Austria
Belgium
02-201-24-18
Bosnia
Bulgaria
Croatia
05 133 1999
07001 33 11
062 SAMSUNG (062 726 7864)
800-SAMSUNG (800-726786)
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační
složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
70 70 19 70
030 - 6227 515
01 48 63 00 00
01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864
€ 0,14/Min)
06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
+381 0113216899
261 03 710
023 207 777
020 405 888
0900-SAMSUNG (09007267864) (€ 0,10/Min)
815-56 480
0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678)
/ 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
1. 08010 SAMSUNG (72678) doar din reţeaua Romtelecom,
tarif local
2. 021.206.01.10 - din orice
reţea, tarif normal
Czech
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italia
Kosovo
Luxemburg
Macedonia
Montenegro
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Portugal
Rumania
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/
be (Dutch)
www.samsung.com/
be_fr (French)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
English Cinavia Notice : This product uses Cinavia technology to
limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an
unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback
or copying will be in interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia
Online Consumer Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com.
To request additional information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard
with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from
Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well as
copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such
technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation.
Copyright 2004 - 2010 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by
Verance. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Français Avis Cinavia : Ce produit utilise la technologie Cinavia
pour limiter l’utilisation de copies illégales de certains films et vidéos
disponibles dans le commerce et de leur bande sonore. Lorsqu’une
utilisation illégale ou une reproduction interdite est détectée, un
message s’affiche et la lecture ou la reproduction s’interrompt.
De plus amples renseignements sur la technologie Cinavia sont
disponibles auprès du Centre d’information des consommateurs en
ligne de Cinavia sur http://www.cinavia.com. Pour obtenir des
renseignements supplémentaires par la poste sur Cinavia, envoyez votre
demande avec votre adresse au : Cinavia Consumer Information Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Ce produit intègre une technologie sous licence de Verance Corporation
protégée par le brevet américain 7,369,677 et d'autres brevets
américains et internationaux déposés ou en attente, de même que
par des droits d'auteur et le secret industriel pour certains aspects de
cette technologie. Cinavia est une marque de commerce de Verance
Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation.
Tous droits réservés par Verance. Il est interdit de tenter de démonter
l’appareil et d’en étudier le fonctionnement en vue de le reproduire.
Español Aviso de Cinavia: Este producto utiliza tecnología
Cinavia para limitar el uso de copias no autorizadas de algunas películas
de producción comercial, videos y sus bandas sonoras. Cuando se
detecta el uso de una copia no autorizada, aparecerá un mensaje y se
interrumpirá la reproducción o la copia.
Información adicional sobre la tecnología Cinavia se facilita en el Centro
de información al cliente en línea de Cinavia en http://www.cinavia.com.
Para solicitar información adicional sobre Cinavia por correo, envíe una
tarjeta con su dirección postal a: Cinavia Consumer Information Center,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, EE.UU.
Este producto incorpora tecnología de propietario bajo licencia de
Verance Corporation y está protegido mediante la patente en EE.UU.
7.369.677 y otras patentes en EE.UU. y en otros países pendientes,
así como por copyright y la protección de secreto comercial de
ciertos aspectos tecnológicos. Cinavia es una marca comercial de
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation.
Todos los derechos reservados por Verance. La ingeniería inversa o
desensamblaje están prohibidos.
Português Nota da Cinavia: Esse produto usa tecnologia
Cinavia para limitar o uso de cópias não autorizadas de filmes e vídeos
produzidos comercialmente e sua trilha sonora. Quando se detecta o
uso proibido de uma cópia não autorizada, aparece uma mensagem e a
reprodução ou cópia é interrompida.
Há mais informações sobre a tecnologia Cinavia na Central Cinavia
on-line de informações ao cliente, em http://www.cinavia.com. Para
solicitar mais informações sobre a Cinavia pelo correio, envie um
cartão postal com seu endereço para: Cinavia Consumer Information
Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Esse produto incorpora tecnologia proprietária sob licença da Verance
Corporation e protegida pela Patente 7.369.677 dos EUA e outras
patentes nos EUA e no mundo todo, emitidas e pendentes, além
de direitos autorais e proteção ao segredo comercial de certos
aspectos dessa tecnologia. Cinavia é uma marca registrada da Verance
Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Todos os
direitos reservados à Verance. É proibido realizar engenharia reversa
ou desmontagem.
Français Avis de Cinavia : Ce produit utilise la technologie
Cinavia pour limiter l'utilisation de copies non autorisées de certains
films et vidéos commerciaux ainsi que leurs bandes son. Lorsqu'une
copie non autorisée est détectée, un message est affiché et la lecture
ou la copie est interrompue. Des informations complémentaires
concernant la technologie Cinavia sont disponibles sur le site http://
www.cinavia.com du Centre d'information consommateur Cinavia. Pour
toute demande d'informations complémentaires concernant Cinavia
par courrier, veuillez écrire à l'adresse suivante : Cinavia Consumer
Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Ce produit intègre la technologie de protection de la propriété sous
licence Verance Corporation protégée par les brevets américains
7,369,677 et d’autres brevets américains et internationaux accordés et
en attente ainsi que la protection des droits d'auteur et de l'information
commerciale confidentielle pour certains aspects de cette technologie.
Cinavia est une marque commerciale de Verance Corporation. Copyright
2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Tous droits réservés par Verance.
Il est interdit de tenter de démonter l’appareil et d’en étudier le
fonctionnement en vue de le reproduire.
Italiano Avvertenza Cinavia : Questo prodotto utilizza
tecnologia Cinavia per limitare l'uso di copie non autorizzate di film
e video commerciali e relative tracce audio. Se viene rilevato l'uso
proibito di una copia non autorizzata, viene visualizzato un messaggio
che interrompe la riproduzione o la copia. Per maggiori informazioni
sulla tecnologia Cinavia consultare il centro online di informazioni
ai consumatori di Cinavia all'indirizzo http://www.cinavia.com. Per
richiedere maggiori informazioni su Cinavia per e-mail, inviare un
messaggio con il proprio indirizzo a: Cinavia Consumer Information
Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Questo prodotto è dotato di tecnologia proprietaria di Verance
Corporation ed è protetto dal brevetto U.S.A. 7.369.677 e da altri
brevetti U.S.A. e di altri Paesi registrati e in attesa di registrazione, di
una protezione del copyright e del segreto aziendale per alcuni aspetti di
tale tecnologia. Cinavia è un marchio di Verance Corporation. Copyright
2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Verance. Tutti i diritti riservati. Sono
vietati il reverse engineering o lo smontaggio.
Português Aviso Cinavia : Este produto utiliza tecnologia Cinavia
para limitar a utilização não autorizada de cópias de alguns filmes
e vídeos produzidos comercialmente e respectivas bandas sonoras.
Quando a utilização proibida de uma cópia não autorizada é detectada,
é apresentada uma mensagem e a reprodução ou cópia é interrompida.
Poderá obter mais informações sobre a tecnologia Cinavia no Centro de
Informação ao Consumidor Online da Cinavia em http://www.cinavia.
com. Para solicitar informações adicionais sobre a Cinavia por correio,
envie um bilhete postal com a sua morada para: Cinavia Consumer
Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Este produto incorpora tecnologia proprietária ao abrigo da licença da
Verance Corporation e protegida pela patente americana, 7,369,677 e
outras patentes dos EUA e de outros países, emitidas ou cuja aprovação
esteja pendente, bem com direitos de autor e protecção de segredo
comercial para determinados aspectos da tecnologia mencionada. A
Cinavia é uma marca comercial da Verance Corporation. Direitos de
autor 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Todos os direitos reservados
pela Verance. É proibido qualquer procedimento de desmontagem ou
montagem.
Español Aviso de Cinavia : Este producto utiliza tecnología
Cinavia para limitar el uso de copias no autorizadas de algunas películas
de producción comercial, vídeos y sus bandas sonoras. Cuando se
detecta el uso de una copia no autorizada, aparecerá un mensaje y se
interrumpirá la reproducción o la copia. Información adicional sobre la
tecnología Cinavia se facilita en el Centro de información al cliente en
línea de Cinavia en http://www.cinavia.com. Para solicitar información
adicional sobre Cinavia por correo, envíe una tarjeta con su dirección
postal a: Cinavia Consumer Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San
Diego, CA, 92138, EE.UU.
Este producto incorpora tecnología de propietario bajo licencia de
Verance Corporation y está protegido mediante la patente en EE.UU.
7.369.677 y otras patentes en EE.UU. y en otros países pendientes,
así como por copyright y la protección de secreto comercial de
ciertos aspectos tecnológicos. Cinavia es una marca comercial de
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation.
Todos los derechos reservados por Verance. La ingeniería inversa o
desensamblaje están prohibidos.
Nederlands Opmerking betreffende Cinavia : Dit product
maakt gebruik van Cinavia-technologie om het gebruik van illegale
exemplaren van sommige commercieel geproduceerde films en video's
en de soundtracks ervan te beperken. Wanneer wordt gedetecteerd dat
een illegale kopie wordt gebruikt, wordt een bericht weergegeven en zal
het afspelen of kopiëren worden onderbroken. U vindt meer informatie
over Cinavia-technologie bij het Cinavia Online Consumer Information
Centre op http://www.cinavia.com. Als u aanvullende informatie over
Cinavia via de post wenst te ontvangen, stuurt u een postkaart met uw
postadres naar: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851,
San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Dit product omvat bedrijfseigen technologie onder licentie van de
Verance Corporation en wordt beschermd door U.S. Patent 7.369.677
en andere Amerikaanse en internationale patenten die zijn verstrekt
of nog in behandeling zijn, naast de bescherming van copyrights en
bedrijfsgeheimen voor bepaalde aspecten van dergelijke technologie.
Cinavia is een handelsmerk van Verance Corporation.
Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Alle rechten voorbehouden
door Verance. Reverseengineering of demontage is verboden.
Dansk Bemærkning vedr. Cinavia : Dette produkt anvender
Cinavia-teknologi til begrænsning af ikkeautoriseret kopiering af visse
kommercielt producerede film og videoer samt deres lydspor. Når
forbudt anvendelse af en ikke-autoriseret kopi detekteres, vises en
meddelelse, og afspilning eller kopiering bliver afbrudt.
Flere informationer om Cinavia-teknologi fås hos Cinavias
onlineforbrugerinformationscenter på http:// www.cinavia.com. For at
få flere informationer om Cinavia pr. post kan du sende et postkort med
din postadresse til: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box
86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Dette produkt anvender producentspecifik teknologi under licens fra
Verance Corporation og er beskyttet af USA-patent 7.369.677 og andre
USA- og vendensomfattende patenter, både allerede udstedte og under
ansøgning, samt copyright og beskyttelse af handelshemmeligheder
for visse dele af sådan teknologi. Cinavia er et varemærke tilhørende
Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Alle
rettigheder forbeholdes Verance. Reverse engineering eller adskillelse
er forbudt.
Suomi
Cinavia-ilmoitus: Tämä tuote käyttää Cinaviatekniikkaa rajoittaakseen joidenkin kaupallisesti tuotettujen elokuvien ja
videoiden sekä niiden ääniraitojen luvattomien kopioiden käyttöä. Kun
luvattoman kopion kielletty käyttö tunnistetaan, viesti tulee näkyviin
ja toisto tai kopiointi keskeytetään. Saat lisätietoja Cinavia-tekniikasta
Cinavia Online Consumer Information Centre -kuluttajakeskuksesta
osoitteessa http://www.cinavia.com. Voit pyytää lisätietoja Cinaviasta
postitse lähettämällä postikortin, joka sisältää postiosoitteesi,
osoitteeseen: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851,
San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Tässä tuotteessa käytetään valmistajien tekniikkaa Verance
Corporationin lisenssillä. Käyttöä suojaavat USA:n patentin 7,369,677 ja
muut USA:n sekä maailmanlaajuiset myönnetyt ja vireillä olevat patentit
sekä tiettyjen tekniikan osien tekijänoikeus- ja kauppasalaisuussuojat.
Cinavia on Verance Corporationin tavaramerkki. Copyright 2004-2010
Verance Corporation. Verance pidättää kaikki oikeudet. Käytetyn
salaustekniikan purkaminen on kielletty.
Norsk Cinavia-merknad : Dette produktet bruker Cinaviateknologi for å begrense bruken av uautoriserte kopier av enkelte
kommersielt produserte filmer, videoer og deres lydspor. Når det
detekteres forbudt bruk av en uautorisert kopi, vises en melding og
avspillingen eller kopieringen vil bli avbrutt. Mer informasjon om Cinaviateknologien finner du hos Cinavias forbrukersenter på http://www.
cinavia. com. For mer informasjon om Cinavia via regulær post, send et
postkort med din postadresse til: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Dette produktet innbefatter proprietær teknologi på lisens fra Verance
Corporation og er beskyttet av amerikansk patent 7,369,677 og andre
amerikanske og verdensomfattende patenter og patentsøknader, samt
beskyttelse av copyright og forretningshemmeligheter for visse aspekter
av slik teknologi. Cinavia er et varemerke som tilhører Sony Corporation.
Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Alle rettigheter forbeholdt
for Verance. Omvendt utvikling eller demontering er forbudt.
Svenska Cinavia-meddelande : Den här produkten använder
Cinavia-teknik för att begränsa antalet obehöriga kopior på vissa
kommersiellt producerade filmer och videor och deras ljudspår.
Om en förbjuden användning av en obehörig kopia upptäcks visas
ett meddelande och uppspelningen eller kopieringen avbryts. Mer
information om Cinavia-tekniken erbjuds av Cinavia Online Consumer
Information Centre på adressen http://www.cinavia.com. För att begära
ytterligare information om Cinavia via post, skicka ett vykort med din
adress till: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San
Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Den här produkten införlivar egendomsteknik på licens från Verance
Corporation och skyddas av det amerikanska patentet 7,369,677
och andra patent i USA och internationellt och väntande patent, samt
upphovsrätt och varumärkesskydd för vissa delar av sådan teknik.
Cinavia är ett varumärke som tillhör Verance Corporation. Upphovsrätt
2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Med ensamrätt för Verance.
Reverse engineering och nedmontering är förbjudet.
Česky
Upozornění k technologii Cinavia : Tento
přístroj využívá technologii Cinavia k omezení použití neoprávněných
kopií některých komerčních filmů a videí a jejich zvukových stop. Při
zjištění zakázaného použití neautorizované kopie se zobrazí hlášení a
přehrávání nebo kopírování je přerušeno. Další informace o technologii
Cinavia naleznete v Online středisku informací pro spotřebitele na webu
http://www.cinavia.com. Další informace o technologii Cinavia si můžete
vyžádat také poštou. Pošlete svou korespondenční adresu na adresu:
Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA,
92138, USA.
Tento přístroj využívá proprietární technologii licencovanou společností
Verance Corporation a je chráněn patentem USA č. 7 369 677 a dalšími
vydanými a přihlášenými patenty ve Spojených státech amerických a
dalších zemích. Na některé aspekty této technologie se také vztahuje
ochrana autorských práv a obchodního tajemství. Cinavia je ochranná
známka společnosti Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010
Verance Corporation. Všechna práva vyhrazena společností Verance.
Zpětná analýza a převod do strojového kódu jsou zakázány.
Deutsch Cinavia Hinweise : Dieses Gerät nutzt die Cinavia
Technologie um die Erstellung illegaler Kopien kommerziell produzierter
Filme und Videos sowie deren Soundtracks zu verhindern. Wenn die
verbotene Nutzung einer illegalen Kopie festgestellt wird, erscheint
eine Meldung und die Wiedergabe bzw. der Kopiervorgang werden
abgebrochen. Mehr Informationen über die Cinavia Technologie finden
Sie im Online Kundeninformationszentrum unter http://www.cinavia.
com. Wenn Sie zusätzliche Informationen über Cinavia über E-Mail
erhalten möchten, senden Sie bitte eine Postkarte mit Ihrer E-Mail
Adresse an: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851,
San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Dieses Gerät nutzt geschützte Technologie unter der Lizenz von Verance
Corporation und ist durch das U.S. Patent 7.369.677 und andere in
der USA und weltweit ausgestellten & angemeldeten Patenten sowie
durch die Urheberrechte und die Sicherung von Betriebsgeheimnissen
bestimmter Aspekte dieser Technologie geschützt. Cinavia ist eine
Handelsmarke von Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance
Corporation. Alle Rechte vorbehalten für Verance Reverse Engineering
oder Demontage sind verboten.
Magyar
Cinavia figyelmeztetés : A készülék a
Cinavia technológiáját használja a kereskedelmi forgalomban lévő
filmek és videók, valamint hangsávjaik illetéktelen másolásának
megakadályozására. Ha illetéktelen másolat tiltott használatát érzékeli,
a készülék megjelenít egy üzenetet, és a lejátszás vagy másolás
félbeszakad.
A Cinavia technológiáról további információkat a Cinavia Online
ügyfélszolgálaton kaphat a http:// www.cinavia.com címen. További
információk a Cinaviáról postai úton küldjön egy levelezőlapot a
postacímével a következő címre: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
A termék egy szerzõi jogvédelmi technológiát alkalmaz, mely eljárást
a Verance Corporation birtokol, és az USA-ban bejegyzett 7,369,677
számú szabadalom, illetve más, az USÁban és máshol bejegyzett
szabadalmak és szerzõi jogok védenek, és az ilyen technológiákra
vonatkozó kereskedelmi titkok. A Cinavia a Verance Corporation
védjegye. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. A Verance
minden jogot fenntart. A rendszer visszafejtése vagy visszafordítása
tilos.
Polski Komentarz Cinavia : Urządzenie to korzysta z
technologii Cinavia w celu ograniczenia wykorzystania nieupoważnionych
kopii pewnych filmów i obrazów wideo wyprodukowanych w celach
komercyjnych, oraz ich ścieżek dźwiękowych. W przypadku wykrycia
zakazanego użycia nieautoryzowanej kopii, zostanie wyświetlony
komunikat i proces odtwarzania i kopiowania zostanie zatrzymany.
Więcej informacji o technologii Cinavia można uzyskać w Centrum
obsługi klienta Cinavia online: http:// www.cinavia.com. Aby poprosić
o przesłanie dodatkowych informacji o Cinavia pocztą, wyślij kartkę ze
swoim adresem pocztowym na adres: Centrum informacji konsumenta
Cinavia, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Urządzenie to zostało wyprodukowane z zastosowaniem technologii
własnościowej na licencji firmy Verance Corporation, i jest chronione
amerykańskim patentem 7,369,677 oraz innymi patentami Stanów
Zjednoczonych i innych krajów, wydanymi i wydawanymi, oraz prawami
autorskimi, a także chroniony tajemnicą handlową obejmującą określone
aspekty takiej technologii. Cinavia jest znakiem towarowym firmy Verance
Corporation. Copyright 2004–2010 Verance Corporation. Wszystkie
prawa zastrzeżone przez firmę Verance. Niedozwolone jest odtwarzanie
wsteczne (ang. reverse engineering) i rozmontowywanie urządzenia.
Slovensky Upozornenie na technológiu Cinavia : Tento
výrobok využíva technológiu Cinavia na obmedzenie používania
neoprávnených kópií niektorých komerčne vyrábaných filmov a videí a
ich zvukových záznamov. Keď sa zistí, že došlo k zakázanému použitiu
neoprávnenej kópie, zobrazí sa správa a prehrávanie alebo kopírovanie
sa preruší.
Viac informácií o technológií Cinavia nájdete na on-line informačnom
centre pre spotrebiteľov Cinavia na lokalite http://www.cinavia.com.
Ak chcete požiadať o zaslanie ďalších informácií o technológii Cinavia
poštou, zašlite list s vašou poštovou adresou na adresu: Cinavia
Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138,
USA.
Tento výrobok obsahuje súkromnú technológiu na základe licencie
od spoločnosti Verance Corporation, ktorá je chránená americkým
patentom č. 7 369 677 a ďalšími patentmi a patentovými prihláškami
v USA a na celom svete, pričom niektoré aspekty tejto technológie
podliehajú aj ochrane autorským právom a ochrane obchodného
tajomstva. Cinavia je obchodná značka spoločnosti Verance Corporation.
Autorské práva 2004 - 2010 Verance Corporation. Spoločnosť Verance
si vyhradzuje všetky práva. Spätná analýza alebo prevod do strojového
kódu sú zakázané.
Slovenščina Obvestilo o tehnologiji Cinavia: Ta izdelek
uporablja tehnologijo Cinavia za omejitev uporabe nepooblaščenih kopij
nekaterih komercialno posnetih filmov in videoposnetkov ter njihovih
zvočnih posnetkov. Kadar naprava zazna uporaba nepooblaščene kopije,
se bo prikazalo sporočilo in predvajanje ali kopiranje se bo prekinilo.
Več informacij o tehnologiji Cinavia najdete v spletnem informacijskem
središču za stranke Cinavia na http://www.cinavia.com. Če želite prejeti
dodatne informacije o tehnologiji Cinavia po pošti, nam pošljite
svoj domači naslov na: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box
86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Ta izdelek vsebuje lastniško tehnologijo z licenco družbe Verance
Corporation in je zaščiten z ameriškim patentom 7,369,677 ter drugimi
izdanimi ali vloženimi ameriškimi in svetovnimi patenti, kot tudi z zakoni
o varstvu pravic in nerazkrivanju poslovnih skrivnosti za določene
vidike takšne tehnologije. Cinavia je blagovna znamka družbe Verance
Corporation. Avtorske pravice 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Vse
pravice si pridržuje družba Verance. Obratno inženirstvo in razstavljanje
sta prepovedana.
Български Бележка за Cinavia : Този продукт използва
технологията Cinavia, за да ограничи използването на неоторизирани
копия на някои филми, видеоклипове и саундтраци. Когато се засече
забранено ползване на неоторизирано копие, ще се покаже съобщение и
възпроизвеждането или копирането ще се прекъсне. Повече информация за
технологията Cinavia се предоставя от онлайн центъра за информация за
клиенти на Cinavia на http://www.cinavia.com. За да поискате
допълнителна информация от Cinavia по пощата, изпратете запитванията с
вашия пощенски адрес на: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box
86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Този продукт използва фирмена технология под лиценз от Verance
Corporation и е защитен с патент на САЩ 7,369,677 и други издадени и
заявени патенти в САЩ и по целия свят, както и от защита на авторското
право и търговските тайни за определени аспекти от такава технология.
Cinavia е търговска марка на Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010
Verance Corporation. Всички права запазени от Verance. Забранен е
инженеринг или демонтиране в обратен ред.
Română Notă din partea Cinavia : Acest aparat utilizează
tehnologie Cinavia pentru a limita utilizarea unor copii neautorizate ale
unor filme sau materiale video produse spre comercializare, precum şi
a coloanelor sonore asociate acestora. Dacă este detectată utilizarea
ilegală sa unei copii neautorizate, va fi afişat un mesaj şi redarea
sau copierea este întreruptă. Pentru informaţii suplimentare despre
tehnologia Cinavia, consultaţi Centrul online de informaţii
pentru consumatori Cinavia, la adresa http://www.cinavia.com. Pentru
a solicita prin poştă informaţii suplimentare despre Cinavia, trimiteţi un
plic timbrat cu adresa dvs. la: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O.
Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Acest aparat încorporează tehnologie de proprietate sub licenţă de la
Verance Corporation şi este protejat de către brevetul SUA 7.369.677
şi de către alte brevete din SUA şi din întreaga lume emise şi în curs
de emitere, precum şi de către legea drepturilor de autor şi a secretului
comercial privind anumite aspecte ale acestei tehnologii. Cinavia este o
marcă comercială a Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance
Corporation. Toate drepturile sunt rezervate de Verance. Este interzisă
demontarea sau dezasamblarea produsului.
Ελληνικά Ειδοποίηση τεχνολογίας Cinavia : Αυτό το
προϊόν χρησιμοποιεί τεχνολογία Cinavia για τον περιορισμό της χρήσης μη
εξουσιοδοτημένων αντιγράφων ορισμένων ταινιών και βίντεο που διατίθενται
στο εμπόριο, καθώς και της ηχητικής επένδυσής τους. Αν ανιχνευτεί απαγορευμένη
χρήση ενός μη εξουσιοδοτημένου αντιγράφου, εμφανίζεται ένα μήνυμα και
διακόπτεται η αναπαραγωγή ή αντιγραφή. Περισσότερες πληροφορίες για την
τεχνολογία Cinavia παρέχονται στο Διαδικτυακό κέντρο πληροφόρησης
πελατών της Cinavia, στη διεύθυνση http://www.cinavia.com. Για να ζητήσετε
πρόσθετες πληροφορίες σχετικά με την τεχνολογία Cinavia μέσω ταχυδρομείου,
στείλτε μια κάρτα με την ταχυδρομική διεύθυνσή σας στο: Cinavia Consumer
Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Το προϊόν αυτό ενσωματώνει αποκλειστική τεχνολογία που χρησιμοποιείται κατόπιν
αδείας από τη Verance Corporation, η οποία προστατεύεται από το δίπλωμα
ευρεσιτεχνίας Η.Π.Α. με αριθμό 7.369.677 και άλλα διπλώματα ευρεσιτεχνίας που
έχουν εκδοθεί και εκκρεμούν στις Η.Π.Α. και διεθνώς, καθώς και από προστασία
πνευματικών δικαιωμάτων και εμπορικών μυστικών για ορισμένα στοιχεία της
συγκεκριμένης τεχνολογίας. Η επωνυμία Cinavia είναι εμπορικό σήμα της Verance
Corporation. Πνευματικά δικαιώματα 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Με
την επιφύλαξη παντός δικαιώματος από τη Verance. Απαγορεύεται η αποσυμπίληση
ή ανακατασκευή κώδικα.
Hrvatski Obavijest o tehnologiji Cinavia : ovaj proizvod rabi
tehnologiju Cinavia kako bi se ograničila uporaba neovlaštenih kopija
nekih komercijalno proizvedenih filmova i videozapisa i njihovih zvučnih
zapisa. Kada se otkrije zabranjena uporaba neovlaštene kopije, prikazat
će se poruka i prekinut će se reproduciranje i kopiranje.
Ostale informacije o tehnologiji Cinavia dostupne su u mrežnom
informacijskom centru za korisnike tvrtke Cinavia na http://www.cinavia.
com. Kako biste zatražili dodatne informacije o tehnologiji Cinavia
putem pošte, pošaljite nam dopis na poštansku adresu: Cinavia
Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138,
SAD.
Ovaj proizvod sadržava zakonom zaštićenu tehnologiju pod licencom
korporacije Verance i zaštićen je američkim patentom 7,369,677 i
ostalim američkim i svjetskim patentima koji su izdanje i čije je izdanje
u tijeku, kao i zaštitama autorskih prava i poslovnih tajni za određene
aspekte te tehnologije. Cinavia je zaštitni znak korporacije Verance.
Autorsko pravo 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Sva prava pridržava
Verance. Zabranjeni su obrnuti inženjering i rastavljanje.
Srpski
Cinavia obaveštenje : Ovaj proizvod koristi
Cinavia tehnologiju za ograničenje upotrebe neovlašćenih kopija nekih
komercijalno proizvedenih filmova i video zapisa i zvučnih zapisa.
Kada se otkrije upotreba neovlašćene kopije, prikazaće se poruka i
reprodukcija ili kopiranje će biti prekinuto.
Više informacija o Cinavia tehnologija dostupne su na internet
informacionom centru za potrošače Cinavia na adresi http://www.cinavia.
com. Da biste zatražili dodatne informacije o Cinavia-i putem pošte,
pošaljite razglednicu sa vaše e-adrese: Cinavia Consumer Information
Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, SAD.
Ovaj proizvod sadrži tehnologiju u vlasništvu pod licencom kompanije
Verance Corporation i zaštićen je američkim patentom 7,369,677 i
drugim američkim i svetskim patentima koji su potvrđeni ili su na
čekanju, kao i zaštitom autorskih prava i poslovne tajne za određene
aspekte takve tehnologije. Cinavia je zaštitni znak kompanije Verance
Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Sva prava
zadržana od strane kompanije Verance. Reinženjering ili demontaža su
zabranjeni.
Қазақша Cinavia ескертуі : Бұл өнімде коммерциялық
фильм мен бейнелердің және олардың саунд-тректерінің
рұқсатсыз көшірмелерін шектеу үшін Cinavia технологиясы
пайдаланылады. Пайдалануға тыйым салынған рұқсатсыз
көшірмені пайдалану анықталса, хабар көрсетіледі және
ойнату немесе көшіру үзіледі. Cinavia технологиясы туралы
қосымша ақпарат http : //www.cinavia.com торабындағы
Cinavia желілік тұтынушылар туралы ақпарат орталығында
берілген. Cinavia туралы қосымша ақпаратты пошта арқылы
сұрау үшін пошта мекенжайыңыз бар ашықхатты мына
мекенжайға жіберіңіз : Cinavia Consumer Information Centre,
P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Бұл Verance корпорациясының лицензиясы бар жекеменшік
технологияны қамтиды және АҚШ-тың 7,369,677 патентімен,
әрі шығарылған және күтудегі басқа АҚШ және дүниежүзілік
патенттермен, сондай-ақ, авторлық құқықтармен және
осындай технологияның белгілі бір жақтарын құпия
қорғаныспен қорғалған. Cinavia – Verance корпорациясының
сауда белгісі. Авторлық құқықтар, 2004-2010 Verance
корпорациясы. Барлық құқықтар Verance корпорациясымен
қорғалған. Кері жобалауға және бөлшектеуге тыйым
салынады.
Русский
Уведомление о Cinavia: Данный продукт оснащен
технологией Cinavia, которая не позволяет использовать незаконно сделанные
копии серийно изготавливаемых записей фильмов и видео, а также музыку
из этих фильмов и видео. В случае обнаружения использования незаконно
сделанной копии на экране появится соответствующее сообщение, и процесс
воспроизведения или копирования будет прерван.
Дополнительные сведения о технологии Cinavia представлены на сайте Центра
информации для потребителей Cinavia по адресу: http://www.cinavia.com.
Чтобы запросить дополнительные сведения о технологии Cinavia по почте,
отправьте нам открытку с вашим почтовым адресом: Cinavia Consumer
Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Данный продукт оснащен запатентованной технологией с лицензией
от Verance Corporation и защищенной патентом США 7,369,677 и
другими патентами США и международными патентами, изданными и
рассматриваемыми, а определенные аспекты этой технологии – авторскими
правами и охраной секретов производствам. Cinavia является товарным
знаком корпорации Verance Corporation. Verance Corporation, 20042010 гг. Все права защищены корпорацией Verance. Инженерный анализ и
разборка запрещены.
Українська Зауваження щодо Cinavia: у цьому продукті
використовується технологія Cinavia, що обмежує використання
несанкціонованих копій деяких комерційних кінофільмів і відеозаписів, а
також використаних у них звукових доріжок. У разі виявлення забороненого
використання несанкціонованої копії, відобразиться відповідне повідомлення,
а відтворення або копіювання буде призупинено.
Додаткові відомості про технологію Cinavia можна знайти в Інформаційному
онлайн-центрі Cinavia за веб-адресою http://www.cinavia.com. Щоб
надіслати запит на отримання додаткової інформації про Cinavia поштою,
надішліть поштову листівку зі своєю поштовою адресою на таку адресу:
Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego,
CA, 92138, USA. У цьому продукті використано запатентовану технологію,
ліцензовану компанії Verance Corporation і захищену патентом США 7 369
677 та іншими всесвітніми патентами, виданими та такими, що очікують
затвердження, а також авторським правом і принципами охорони таємниць
виробництва певних аспектів цієї технології. Cinavia є торговельною маркою
Verance Corporation. Авторське право належить корпорації Verance
Corporation, 2004-2010 рр. Усі права належать корпорації Verance.
Забороняється вносити зміни до конструкції продукту або розбирати його.
繁體中文 Cinavia 聲明:本產品使用 Cinavia 技術來限制
使用某些商業製造的電影和視訊及其聲道的未經授權副本。當偵測
到禁止使用的未經授權副本時,將會顯示一則訊息,並且播放或複
製動作將會中斷。
Cinavia 技術的詳細資訊在 Cinavia
線上消費者資訊中心中提供,網址為:http://www.
cinavia.com。若要透過郵件請求關於 Cinavia
的其他資訊,請將含有您的郵寄地址的明信片寄往:Cinavia
Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA,
92138, USA.
本产品融合了在获得 Verance Corporation 许可并且受美国专利
7,369,677 以及其他在盖和世界各地已公布和正在申请的专利保护
,并且受此类技术特定方面的版权和商业秘密保护。
Cinavia 是 Verance Corporation 的商标。20042010 Verance Corporation 版权所有。Verance
保留一切权利。严禁进行逆向工程和反汇编。
中国语 Cinavia 声明:本产品使用 Cinavia 技术来限制使用
一些商业制造的电影和视频及其声道的未获得授权的副本。检测到
禁止使用未获得授权的副本的情况时,将会显示消息,并且播放或
复制将会中断。
有关 Cinavia 技术的更多信息,在 Cinavia
在线消费者信息中心提供,网址如下:http://www.
cinavia.com。要通过邮件请求关于 Cinavia
的更多信息,请将含有您的邮寄地址的明信片寄往:Cinavia
Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA,
92138, USA.
本产品融合了在获得 Verance Corporation 许可并且受美国专利
7,369,677 以及其他在盖和世界各地已公布和正在申请的专利保护
,并且受此类技术特定方面的版权和商业秘密保护。
Cinavia 是 Verance Corporation 的商标。20042010 Verance Corporation 版权所有。Verance
保留一切权利。严禁进行逆向工程和反汇编。
‫ל עגונב העדוה עברית‬-Cinavia : ‫שמתשמ הז רצומ‬
‫ תיגולונכטב‬Cinavia ‫יתלב םיקתעהב שומישה תא ליבגהל ידכ‬
‫םהלש לוקה יספו תירחסמ הקפהב םיטרס לש םייקוח‬. ‫ההוזי רשאכ‬
‫יקוח יתלב קתועב רוסא שומיש‬, ‫וא הלעפה לכו העדוה ךכ לע גצות‬
‫וקספוי הקתעה‬.
‫ תיגולונכט תודוא ףסונ עדימ‬Cinavia ‫עדימה זכרמב אוצמל ןתינ‬
‫ לש ןכרצל ןווקמה‬Cinavia ‫ תבותכב‬http://www.cinavia.com.
‫ תודוא ףסונ עדימ תלבקל‬Cinavia ‫ראודב‬, ‫ךתבותכ םע היולג חלש‬
‫לא‬: ‫‏‬Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. ‫‏‬Box
86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
‫דיגאת םעטמ ןוישיר תחת תיניינק היגולונכט בלשמ הז רצומ‬
Verance ‫ יאקירמא טנטפ ידי לע ןגומ אוהו‬7,369,677 ‫םיטנטפו‬
‫םייולתו םידמוע םהש וא ולבקתהש םירחא םיימלועו םיאקירמא‬,
‫םיטבה רובע םיירחסמ תודוסו םירצוי תויוכז לע הנגה ידי לע םג ומכ‬
‫וזכ היגולונכט לש םימיוסמ‬. Cinavia ‫דיגאת לש ירחסמ למס אוה‬
Verance. ‫ םירצוי תויוכז‬2004 - 2010 ‫ דיגאת‬Verance. ‫לכ‬
‫ל תורומש תויוכזה‬-Verance. ‫וא רוחאל הסדנה עצבל רוסיא לח‬
‫רצומה קוריפ‬.
Thai
ประกาศเกี่ยวกับ Cinavia :
ผลิตภัณฑ์นี้ใช้เทคโนโลยี Cinavia เพื่อจำกัดการใช้งานแผ่น
ที่ไม่ได้รับอนุญาตของฟิล์มและวิดีโอและแทร็กเสียงที่ผลิตม
าเพื่อการค้าบางแผ่น เมื่อพบการใช้งานต้องห้ามของแผ่นที่ไ
ม่ได้รับอนุญาต ข้อความจะปรากฏขึ้นและการเล่นหรือการคัด
ลอกจะหยุดทำงาน
ข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับเทคโนโลยี Cinavia มีให้ที่ศูนย์
ข้อมูลลูกค้าทางออนไลน์ของ Cinavia ที่ http://www.
cinavia.com หากต้องการขอรับข้อมูลเพิ่มเติมเกี่ยวกับ
Cinavia ทางไปรษณีย์ ส่งโปสการ์ดที่มีที่อยู่ของคุณไป
ที่: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box
86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA
ผลิตภัณฑ์นี้รวมเอาเทคโนโลยีเอกสิทธิ์เฉพาะภายใต้การอ
นุญาตจาก Verance Corporation และได้รบ
ั ความคุม
้ ครอง
โดยสิทธิบัตรสหรัฐฯ เลขที่ 7,369,677 และสิทธิบัตรสหรัฐ
ฯ อื่นๆ และทั่วโลกที่ประกาศแล้วและรอการพิจารณา รวม
ทั้งลิขสิทธิ์และการป้องกันความลับทางการค้าในบางด้าน
ของเทคโนโลยีดังกล่าว Cinavia เป็นเครื่องหมายการค้าข
อง Verance Corporation ลิขสิทธิ์ 2004-2010 Verance
Corporation สงวนสิทธิ์ทั้งหมดโดย Verance ห้ามดำเนิน
การทางวิศวกรรมย้อนกลับหรือถอดชิ้นส่วนผลิตภัณฑ์
Türkçe Cinavia Notice : This product uses Cinavia technology
to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some commercially-produced
film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use of an
unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback
or copying will be interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia
Online Consumer Information Centre at http://www.cinavia.com. To
request additional information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard
with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information Centre, P.O.
Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
This product incorporates proprietary technology under licence from
Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677
and other U.S. and worldwide patents issued and pending as well
as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects of such
technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright
2004-2010 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Indonesia Pemberitahuan Cinavia : Produk ini menggunakan
teknologi Cinavia untuk membatasi penggunaan tanpa izin salinan
film dan video tertentu yang diproduksi secara komersial serta
soundtracknya. Apabila penggunaan salinan tanpa izin yang dilarang
terdeteksi, pesan akan ditampilkan dan pemutaran atau penyalinan akan
dihentikan.
Informasi selengkapnya tentang teknologi Cinavia tersedia di Pusat
Informasi Pelanggan Online Cinavia di http://www.cinavia.com. Untuk
meminta informasi tambahan mengenai Conavia melaui pos, kirimkan
kartu pos dengan alamat surat Anda ke: Cinavia Consumer Information
Centre,P.O.Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Produk ini menerapkan teknologi milik sendiri berdasarkan lisensi dari
Verance Corporation dan dilindungi oleh Paten AS 7,369,677 dan paten
AS dan di seluruh dunia lainnya yang terdaftar dan dalam pendaftaran,
serta perlindungan hak cipta dan rahasia dagang atas aspek tertentu
dari teknologi tersebut. Cinavia adalah merek dagang dari Verance
Corporation. Hak Cipta 2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Semua hak
dimiliki oleh Verance. Rekayasa balik atau pembongkaran dilarang.
Tiếng Việt Thông báo của Cinavia: Sản phẩm này
sử dụng công nghệ Cinavia để hạn chế việc sử dụng các
bản sao trái phép một số bộ phim và video được sản xuất
thương mại và các đoạn âm thanh của chúng. Khi bị phát
hiện sử dụng bản sao trái phép, một thông báo sẽ được
hiển thị và việc phát lại hoặc sao chép sẽ bị gián đoạn.
Thông tin khác về công nghệ Cinavia được cung cấp
tại Trung tâm thông tin dành cho người tiêu dùng trực
tuyến Cinavia ở địa chỉ http://www.cinavia.com. Để yêu
cầu thông tin khác về Cinavia qua thư, hãy gửi một danh
thiếp kèm theo địa chỉ nhận thư của bạn đến: Cinavia
Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San
Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
Sản phẩm này tích hợp công nghệ độc quyền theo giấy
phép của Verance Corporation và được bảo hộ bởi Bằng
sáng chế Hoa Kỳ 7,369,677 và các bằng sáng chế của
Hoa Kỳ và trên toàn thế giới khác đã được cấp và đang
chờ cấp cũng như sự bảo vệ bí mật thương mại và bản
quyền đối với các khía cạnh cụ thể của công nghệ đó.
Cinavia là nhãn hiệu của Verance Corporation. Bản quyền
2004-2010 Verance Corporation. Mọi quyền được bảo lưu
bởi Verance. Nghiêm cấm thiết kế đối chiếu và tháo rời
sản phẩm.
ΔϴΑήόϟ΍ΔϐϠϟ΍
AK68-02016A-00
Download PDF

advertising